pds drawing manager

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User’s Guide Document Number Version Date Pages DPDS3-PB-200004A PDS 7.1 April 2002 1-496 DPDS3-PB-200004B PDS 7.2 February 2003 497-525 DPDS3-PB-200004C PDS 7.3 October 2004 526-536

Copyright Copyright © 1984-2004 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation

Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license.

No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

If You Need Assistance________________

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph Online

Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’sproducts, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.

Support

For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect tohttp://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.

If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web athttp://www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph Directory

The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If youare outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.

Intergraph General Information

All countries — 1-256-730-2000

Training Registration

1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only)

1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

Mailing Address

Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore300 Intergraph WayMadison, Alabama 35758U.S.A.

You can also reach us by electronic mail at [email protected].

3

________________

Documentation Contacts

We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and othereducational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentationor where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:

Mail Intergraph Process, Power & OffshoreDocumentation Manager300 Intergraph WayMadison, AL 35758

4

Table of Contents________________

Table of Contents

If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 3

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 13

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 14Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 15

1. Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) ................................................................................. 17

Drawing Manager Introduction .................................................................................................... 19

2. Overview of Drawing Manager .................................................................................................... 21

2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager ......................................................................................... 232.2 Drawing Manager Theory of Operation .............................................................................. 24

2.2.1 Drawings ................................................................................................................. 252.2.2 Drawing Views ........................................................................................................ 262.2.3 Drawing Borders ..................................................................................................... 272.2.4 Drawing Plot Size ................................................................................................... 292.2.5 Seed Files ................................................................................................................ 312.2.6 Drawing Categories ................................................................................................. 332.2.7 Cells ........................................................................................................................ 352.2.8 Database Tables ...................................................................................................... 362.2.9 Standard Notes / Code Lists .................................................................................... 392.2.10 Labels .................................................................................................................... 392.2.11 Drawing Manager’s Output ................................................................................... 402.2.12 Customizing Drawing Manager ............................................................................ 41

2.2.12.1 Automatic Title Block Generation ....................................................... 422.2.12.2 The ASCII Text Node Definition File ................................................. 452.2.12.3 Supplemental Title Block Data ............................................................ 472.2.12.4 Nominal Pipe Diameter Value ............................................................. 482.2.12.5 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters ..................................... 49

3. Drawing Management .................................................................................................................. 51

3.1 Using the Drawing Management Commands ..................................................................... 53

4. Drawing Manager ......................................................................................................................... 55

4.1 Create Options ..................................................................................................................... 57

5

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________

4.1.1 Create Drawing ....................................................................................................... 594.1.2 Create Drawing from ASCII File ............................................................................ 634.1.3 Copy Drawing ......................................................................................................... 68

4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data .................................................................................. 71

4.1.4 Create Drawing View .............................................................................................. 73

4.1.4.1 Named Item .............................................................................................. 77

4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model ........................................................... 794.1.4.1.2 Named Item by Project ........................................................... 81

4.1.4.2 Saved View .............................................................................................. 834.1.4.3 Define View Location .............................................................................. 84

4.2 Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... 864.3 Create Composite Drawing View ....................................................................................... 89

4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 93

4.3.1.1 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View .............................. 95

4.3.2 Create Composite Drawing Views Example ........................................................... 96

4.4 Revise Options .................................................................................................................... 102

4.4.1 Revise Drawing ....................................................................................................... 1044.4.2 Revise Drawing View ............................................................................................. 107

4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data ...................................................................... 1094.4.2.2 Revise Composite Drawing View Data ................................................... 112

4.4.2.2.1 Redefine Individual Views ..................................................... 114

4.4.2.3 Revise Orientation .................................................................................... 1164.4.2.4 Reference Models ..................................................................................... 118

4.4.2.4.1 Copy From Active Drawing ................................................... 1204.4.2.4.2 Copy From Another Drawing ................................................ 1224.4.2.4.3 Attach Model .......................................................................... 1254.4.2.4.4 Detach Model ......................................................................... 1274.4.2.4.5 Auto Attach/Verify ................................................................. 128

4.5 Delete Options ..................................................................................................................... 131

4.5.1 Delete Drawing ....................................................................................................... 1324.5.2 Delete Drawing View .............................................................................................. 133

6


4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data .................................................................................. 1354.7 Report Models Form ........................................................................................................... 138

4.7.1 Using the Report Commands .................................................................................. 140

4.8 Report Format Form ............................................................................................................ 142

4.8.1 Format Creation/Revision Form ............................................................................. 1444.8.2 Format Deletion Form ............................................................................................. 146

4.9 Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................................... 148

4.9.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form ........................................................................ 1504.9.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form ....................................................................... 152

4.9.2.1 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form ................................................... 1544.9.2.2 Search Criteria - Component Form .......................................................... 158

4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form ........................................................................ 163

4.10 Search Criteria Data Form ................................................................................................ 165

4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form .................................................................... 1674.10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form ................................................................... 1704.10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form ............................................................................ 172

4.11 Report Form ...................................................................................................................... 174

4.11.1 Report Creation Form ......................................................................................... 1764.11.2 Revise Report Form ............................................................................................ 1794.11.3 Report Deletion Form ......................................................................................... 1824.11.4 Report Approval Form ........................................................................................ 184

4.11.4.1 Approval/Revision Interface Form .................................................... 186

4.11.5 Report Multiple Submit Form ............................................................................. 188

4.12 Report Management Defaults Form .................................................................................. 1904.13 Approve Drawing .............................................................................................................. 192

5. Graphics Environment ................................................................................................................. 195

5.1 Drawing ............................................................................................................................... 1965.2 View .................................................................................................................................... 197

5.2.1 View Commands ..................................................................................................... 200

Viewing Options ................................................................................................. 2015.2.1.1 Drawing Categories .............................................................................. 203

7


5.2.1.1.1 Review/Revise Category .................................................... 2045.2.1.1.2 Add Category ..................................................................... 2055.2.1.1.3 Remove Category ............................................................... 206

5.2.2 View, More Commands .......................................................................................... 2075.2.3 Viewing Direction ................................................................................................... 2095.2.4 View Depth ............................................................................................................. 210

5.3 File ...................................................................................................................................... 211

5.3.1 Plot .......................................................................................................................... 2125.3.2 File Design .............................................................................................................. 2145.3.3 Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2155.3.4 Active Options ........................................................................................................ 2165.3.5 Select Another Drawing .......................................................................................... 221

5.4 Element ............................................................................................................................... 2225.5 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 2235.6 User ..................................................................................................................................... 225

6. Composing Drawings ................................................................................................................... 227

6.1 Create Drawing View .......................................................................................................... 228

6.1.1 Named Item ............................................................................................................. 232

6.1.1.1 Named Item by Model ............................................................................. 2346.1.1.2 Named Item by Project ............................................................................. 236

6.1.2 Saved View ............................................................................................................. 2386.1.3 Define View Location ............................................................................................. 239

6.2 Create Composite View ...................................................................................................... 241

6.2.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View .......................................................... 2446.2.2 Define Composite Drawing With Saved View ....................................................... 2466.2.3 Create Composite Drawing Views Example ........................................................... 247

6.3 Copy Drawing View ........................................................................................................... 2536.4 Create Section View ............................................................................................................ 2566.5 Create Composite Plan View .............................................................................................. 2596.6 Compose Drawing ............................................................................................................... 2636.7 Compose Drawing View ..................................................................................................... 265

6.7.1 Reference Models .................................................................................................... 269

6.7.1.1 Copy Active Drawing .............................................................................. 2716.7.1.2 Copy Another Drawing ............................................................................ 2736.7.1.3 Attach Model ............................................................................................ 2756.7.1.4 Automatic Attach & Verify ...................................................................... 277

8


6.7.1.5 Detach Model ........................................................................................... 2796.7.1.6 Reference Model Categories .................................................................... 280

6.7.1.6.1 Review/Revise ........................................................................ 2826.7.1.6.2 Add Category ......................................................................... 2836.7.1.6.3 Remove Category ................................................................... 284

6.7.2 Delete Drawing View .............................................................................................. 2856.7.3 Align Drawing View ............................................................................................... 2866.7.4 Revise View Data .................................................................................................... 2886.7.5 Revise Orientation ................................................................................................... 2906.7.6 Unassigned Views ................................................................................................... 292

7. Annotating Drawings ................................................................................................................... 293

7.1 Mass Annotation ................................................................................................................. 2957.2 Place Labels ........................................................................................................................ 3047.3 Equipment Centerlines ........................................................................................................ 3157.4 Update Labels ...................................................................................................................... 321

7.4.1 Revise Text .............................................................................................................. 3267.4.2 Edit Text .................................................................................................................. 327

7.5 Revision Markers ................................................................................................................ 3287.6 Display Report .................................................................................................................... 3307.7 Place Cell ............................................................................................................................ 3337.8 Place Text and Line ............................................................................................................. 3357.9 Overlay Drawing ................................................................................................................. 3387.10 Review Attribute ............................................................................................................... 3407.11 Measure Distance .............................................................................................................. 3417.12 Drawing Annotation Symbology ...................................................................................... 3437.13 Name Label ....................................................................................................................... 3467.14 Coordinate Label ............................................................................................................... 3587.15 Automatic Labels .............................................................................................................. 369

7.15.1 Label Fence Contents .......................................................................................... 3727.15.2 Search Criteria - Component Form ..................................................................... 373

8. Update Annotation Labels ............................................................................................................ 379

9. Vector Hidden Line Manager ....................................................................................................... 381

9.1 Viewing Hidden Line Graphics .......................................................................................... 3909.2 Symbology Based VHL Drawings ...................................................................................... 393

9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map ....................................................................... 395

9.2.1.1 Drawing Type Map Association .............................................................. 3969.2.1.2 Search Criteria Symbology Map .............................................................. 397

9


9.2.1.2.1 EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria ......................................... 3989.2.1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria ................................. 401

10. Search Criteria for VHL ............................................................................................................. 403

10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form ................................................................................ 40510.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form ............................................................................... 40810.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form ........................................................................................ 410

11. Plot Manager .............................................................................................................................. 413

11.1 Plot Drawing ................................................................................................................... 414

11.1.1 Drawing Categories ........................................................................................... 41811.1.2 Reference Models .............................................................................................. 419

12. Project Planner ........................................................................................................................... 423

12.1 Project Planner Command Menu .................................................................................... 424

12.1.1 PlotPlan ............................................................................................................. 425

12.1.1.1 Drawing Views ................................................................................. 426

12.1.1.1.1 Delete Unassigned View .............................................. 42912.1.1.1.2 Update Views ............................................................... 43112.1.1.1.3 Select Model ................................................................. 43212.1.1.1.4 Named Item .................................................................. 43312.1.1.1.5 Graphic Symbology ..................................................... 435

12.1.1.2 Viewing Options .............................................................................. 437

12.1.1.2.1 Set View Orientation .................................................... 43812.1.1.2.2 Update Window ........................................................... 43912.1.1.2.3 Rotate About View ....................................................... 44012.1.1.2.4 Match Planar Element .................................................. 44112.1.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points .......................................................... 44212.1.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation .................................................. 44312.1.1.2.7 Color Shading .............................................................. 44412.1.1.2.8 Camera View ................................................................ 44712.1.1.2.9 Views ............................................................................ 44912.1.1.2.10 Level Symbology On ................................................. 45012.1.1.2.11 Level Symbology Off ................................................. 45112.1.1.2.12 Form Left/Right Screen .............................................. 452

12.1.1.3 Exit ................................................................................................... 453

12.1.2 View .................................................................................................................. 45412.1.3 File .................................................................................................................... 455

10


12.1.3.1 File Design ....................................................................................... 45612.1.3.2 Exit ................................................................................................... 457

13. Project Setup .............................................................................................................................. 459

13.1 Drawing Type .................................................................................................................. 46313.2 Reference Categories ....................................................................................................... 46513.3 Copy Drawing Type ........................................................................................................ 46813.4 Remove Reference .......................................................................................................... 47013.5 Plotting Categories .......................................................................................................... 47113.6 Label Filter ...................................................................................................................... 472

14. Plot Setup Manager .................................................................................................................... 473

14.1 Create I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 47514.2 Revise I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 47714.3 Delete I/Plot Parameter File ............................................................................................ 479

Appendix A: Error Messages .......................................................................................................... 481

Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 483

Index .................................................................................................................................................... 491

11


12


General Conventions

This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certainwords or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you toscan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identifycommonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.

Typefaces

Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software isdoing. For example,

The text is placed in the viewing plane.

Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Commandpaths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,

Choose File > Open to load a new file.

Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken bythe user. For example,

Select first segment of alignment

Bold TypewriterIndicates what you should literally type in. For example,

Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.

Normal TypewriterIndicates an actual file or directory name. For example,

The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.

13


Symbols

This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify specialinformation:

<C> Command button<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)

Note — Important supplemental information.

Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.

Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software isdoing or how it processes information.

Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form.

More information — indicates there is additional or related information.

Need a hint — used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing theexercises.

Keyboard Conventions

The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys anddescribes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through theuse of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.

ALT Alternate keyCTRL Control keyDEL Delete keyENTER Enter keyESC Escape key

CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.

14


Terminology

Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins anaction. For example,

Click Apply to save the changes.

Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by pickingit with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. Afterselecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. Forexample,

Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete toremove it from the directory.

In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such asselecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphicelements from the design file. For example,

Select the line string to define the graphic template.

Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a designfile. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-selectby double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-heldcursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, youtentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.

Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-heldcursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you areclicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.For example,

Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.

Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse orhand-held cursor.

Type To key a character string into a text box.

Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute thedefault action.

In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data willenter the data and move the cursor to the next field.

15


16

1.Overview

Welcome to Drawing Manager (PD_Draw)________________

1. Welcome to Drawing Manager(PD_Draw)

Designers use the Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) product to create and/or reviseorthographic production drawings. PD_Draw can be used with other PDS 3D products toplace annotation labels identifying intelligent items and model coordinates, to plot thedrawings, and to produce reports for drawings and model data.

About this user’s guide

The Drawing Manager is organized by subject and commands on the Drawing Managerinterface and graphics environment. It is divided into several chapters.

Chapter 1 — Provides an overview of the Drawing Manager. It describes generalinformation, terms, and work flow.

Chapter 2 — Describes the Drawing Manager theory of operation, and describes a fewcustomization methods.

Chapter 3 — Describes the Drawing Management form and options used to create andmanipulate drawings and drawing views.

Chapter 4 — Describes the non-graphics Drawing Manager environment.

Chapter 5 — Describes the interactive graphics environment for Drawing Manager.

Chapter 6 — Describes the Drawing Composition options from the Drawing pull-downmenu.

Chapter 7 — Describes the Drawing Annotation options from the Drawing pull-downmenu.

Chapter 8 — Describes the Update Annotation Labels command.

Chapter 9 — Describes the Vector Hidden Line Manager and its use.

Chapter 10 — Describes the Search Criteria used in the creation of symbology basedVHL drawings.

Chapter 11 — Describes the PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to thegraphics environment.

Chapter 12 — Describes the Project Planner command, creating a Key Plan model filefor the project, and creating unassigned drawing views.

17

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Chapter 13 — Describes how to use the Project Setup command options to set defaultsfor all drawings in a project. These defaults are utilized at the time each drawing iscreated.

Chapter 14 — Describes the option that specifies the name, description, and the full filespecifications for an I/Plot Parameter file.

Appendix A — Lists error messages generated by Drawing Manager.

18

1.Overview

Drawing Manager Introduction________________

Drawing Manager Introduction

The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques tointegrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.

The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise orthographic production drawings. It canbe used by any of the 3D disciplines within PDS for drawing management.

Drawing Manager Features

The Drawing Manager can be used to:

Create drawings of models for any of the PDS 3D disciplines, along with key plandrawings.

Create multiple drawing views for a given drawing.

Revise definition information for existing drawings or drawing views.

Delete drawings and drawing views.

Report on drawing information in the Project Control Database.

Report on model data in a specified drawing and drawing view(s).

Place drawing views graphically within a drawing border.

Revise drawing view characteristics, including clipping volume, orientation, referencefile attachments, and display categories.

Place annotation labels on a drawing to identify intelligent items and modelcoordinates.

Create hidden-line-removed model graphics.

Plot a drawing or set of drawings.

Create a key plan model for the project.

19


20

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Overview of Drawing Manager________________

2. Overview of Drawing Manager

The 3D PDS products use interactive graphics and database management techniques tointegrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.

Since a process plant can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to breakthe plant into smaller units that can be handled more easily.

A Project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant.The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. The project constitutes the entirevolume of the project.

A Design Area represents a specified volume of the project for a specific discipline.

A model is a 3D Microstation file that has a defined discipline and is located within thevolume of the project.

Besides the terms above, which are used in most PDS applications, the Drawing Manageruses the following terms.

A drawing is a sheet or a plot used to describe the design of a model design volume (workarea). Many drawings can be created from one model to completely document a designvolume. A drawing can contain more than one drawing view of a model or models.

A drawing view is a view of a model or models. Each drawing view within a drawing canhave a different scale and each label within a drawing can have a different character size.

You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the referencemodel attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for thedrawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These modelgraphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views.

Because the model graphics are reference file attachments, the graphics in the drawingsautomatically change as the design changes in the model. In other words, the drawing viewgraphics are always up-to-date and synchronized with the model.

Unlike model graphics, labels, dimensions, and vector hidden-line (VHL) graphics are"snapshots" of the model. Labels can be updated with the Update Labels commands;dimensions must be revised by the user; and VHL graphics must be re-generated.

The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of PDS 3D projects. Eachproject consists of a Project Control Database, Project Design Database, piping and equipmentmodels, reference models (structural, HVAC, electrical raceway, and user-defineddisciplines), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may bespecific to one project or shared by multiple projects.

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use them in any of the other PDS 3D modules. Refer to the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.

21

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The Drawing Manager is used to create and revise, plot, and report on orthographicproduction drawings of 3D PDS models.

22

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Before Using Drawing Manager________________

2.1 Before Using Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager uses PDS model files for reference when creating orthographic drawings.This means that Drawing Manager cannot perform its job until a project has been defined andat least one model file exists.

Project Setup

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use the Drawing Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for information on

Loading PDS 3D products.

Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.

Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.

Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.

Model Files

A set of model files for the project must be defined before you can use the DrawingManager.

Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulating PDS 3DModels.

Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide

PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide

MicasPlus ModelDraft Reference Guide

PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide

23


2.2 Drawing Manager Theory ofOperation

This section should familiarize you with the general theory behind how the Drawing Managermodule works, and how it can be customized for suiting your needs. The following topicswill be discussed:

Drawings

Drawing Views

Drawing Borders

Drawing Plot Size

Seed Files

Drawing Categories

Cells

Tables

Standard Notes / Code Lists

Labels

Drawing Manager’s Output

Customizing Drawing Manager

24

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Drawings________________

2.2.1 Drawings

A drawing file does not consist of model graphics; a drawing contains intelligent labels,MicroStation dimensioning, title block text, VHL graphics, and user text and graphics. Themodel graphics are attached as reference files, and are not part of the actual drawing file.

Think of a drawing as a pane of glass (drawing file) under which you can see multipleoverlapping, transparent images (reference files) that correspond to user-defined sections ofvarious model files. When you annotate a drawing, you are merely placing information on thepane of glass - not on the images themselves.

The illustration below includes a drawing that references a border file and four other attachedreference model files: equipment, structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway models.

All drawings have a plot size value and can have various levels or categories displayed withinthem. Each drawing view can be assigned a scale value.

25


2.2.2 Drawing Views

A drawing view is a "window" into the model with the following characteristics:

User-specified scale. (For example, 3/8" = 1’.)

User-specified viewing direction. (For example, Looking North.)

User-specified viewing volume. (For example, user-defined high and low Easting,Northing, and Elevation values, or using the volume of a previously-defined view.)

User-specification of referenced models. (For example, one or more piping model files,one or more equipment model files, etc.)

A drawing view can be limited to display only specific portions of the model, or the entiremodel (or a part of it) shown from a different perspective, or the entire model (or a part of it)displayed at a different scale for detail. Views help to document the drawing by allowing theuser to display several orientations or emphasize specific portions of the model. For moreinformation about drawing views, refer to Composing Drawings, page 227.

Changes in any referenced model files are automatically reflected in thedrawing view.

26

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Drawing Borders________________

2.2.3 Drawing Borders

Borders are user-created MicroStation design files. For an Imperial units project where thesmallest scale to be shown on any drawing is 1/8" = 1’, border files should be created withMaster Units =1, Sub Units=12, Positional Units = 195072, and should be drawn in a 1:1scale. For example, cutting lines of an A size plot should be 8 1/2 inches and 11 inches long,while the actual drawing border lines should be offset from the cutting lines by whateverdistance you want.

A sample A-size border design is shown below:

When creating your border files, be sure to obey the drawing type conventions discussed inBefore Using Drawing Manager, page 23. You must follow the conventions established byStandard Note 1202 and Standard Note 2000 for drawing size and type.

Do not use any Microstation predefined shapes (square, polygon, etc.) to create theborder or the cutting lines; instead, use lines or line strings. The system hidden linesoftware (Vector Hidden Line) interprets shapes as surfaces, and may giveupredictable results in the finished drawing such as clipped or missing graphics.

Border files may contain specific locations for placing text (text nodes). Thisfeature allows for automatic placement of title block information, among otheruses. For more information about text nodes, refer to the MicroStationdocumentation. For more information about automatic title block generation,refer to Automatic Title Block Generation, page 42.

The Drawing Manager uses the following guidelines to determine which drawing border toattach.

27

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The directory and network address for the drawing border is defined in the RDBManagement Data with the Reference Data Manager. This setting is stored in theProject Control Database for access by the Drawing Manager.

The file specifications for the drawing borders are determined by the following namingconvention.

dwgbrd_<drawing_type>.<drawing_size>

The drawing_type is the standard note number in Standard Note Type 2000 for drawingtypes.

The drawing_size is the text for the standard note value corresponding to the drawingsize in the Standard Note Type 1202.

For example, the drawing border name for an ’A’ size Equipment Arrangement drawingis dwgbrd_661.a.

The center of the border is always 0 for the x, y, and z coordinates.

28

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Drawing Plot Size________________

2.2.4 Drawing Plot Size

The Draw Plot Size Table is located in the drawplotsize file and is copied from the PD_Shelldelivery directory at the time a project is created. This file specifies the view locations withina drawing on a specific media size. It contains the drawing size standard note, plotting mediasize, the four margins that define view location, and the standard engineering notation for theplotting media size. For more information about defining view locations, refer toDefine View Location, page 84 . An example of a drawplotsize file and definitions of each

field follows:

!Drawing Plot Size Table!!Drawing Size Cutting Edge Margins from Cutting Edge (Drawing Size)!Std Note Size X-l Y-t X-r Y-b!1 8.5"x11" 0.8125" 0.625" 2.125" 0.625 (A)2 11"x17" 1" 0.6875" 3" 0.6875" (B)3 17"x22" 1.1875" 0.75" 3.75" 0.75" (C)4 24"x36" 1.375" 0.8125" 5.4375" 0.8125" (D)5 34"x44" 1.5625" 0.875" 6.875" 0.875" (E)6 28"x40" 1.625" 0.9375" 5.625" 0.9375" (F)101 840mmx1189mm 56mm 35mm 198mm 35mm (A0)102 595mmx840mm 47mm 30mm 193mm 30mm (A1)103 420mmx595mm 38mm 27mm 190mm 27mm (A2)104 297mmx420mm 33mm 25mm 155mm 72mm (A3)105 210mmx297mm 28mm 24mm 65mm 24mm (A4)

Drawing Size Std Note — This is the standard note, referenced from the Standard NoteType 1202, for the drawing size selected.

Cutting Edge Size — This reflects the actual size of the cutting edge which is themedia cutting edge dimensions around the border that is associated with the drawingsize. If plot limits of the output device are less than cutting edge dimensions, DrawingManager scales the plot down to fit within the plotting limits.

If the plot limits are greater than cutting edge dimensions, no fit is performed and theplot border including cutting lines is generated. Excess paper can be trimmed and thetrue A, B, C, D, E, F, or A0, A1, A2, A3, or A4 size drawing sheet remains.

If plot limits are equal to the drawplotsize dimensions, no fit is performed, the plot isgenerated and no cutting lines appear because they are coincident with the edges of theplot medium.

29


Margins from Cutting Edge —

X-l — This defines the horizontal distance from the left cutting edge for composition.(This value corresponds with X1 as described in Define View Location.)

X-r — This defines the horizontal distance from the right cutting edge for composition.(This value corresponds with X2 as described in Define View Location.)

Y-t — This defines the vertical distance from the top cutting edge for composition.(This value corresponds with Y1 as described in Define View Location.)

Y-b — This defines the vertical distance from the bottom cutting edge for composition.(This value corresponds with Y2 as described in Define View Location.)

Drawing Size — This is the standard note text for the drawing size.

30

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Seed Files________________

2.2.5 Seed Files

Seed files control the default "styles" of drawings produced by Drawing Manager. Alldrawings based on the same seed file will have the same types of line weights, text heights,colors, units of measurement, orientation values, default plot categories, etc.

The Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File option on the Project Setup form specifieswhether the default project drawing seed file or an alternate drawing seed file is used for aspecific drawing type. The default project drawing seed file, drwsdz.dgn, is stored in theproject directory and is used as the seed file for all drawing types, unless an alternate isspecified by drawing type.

If the Project Seed File option is specified, all subsequent drawings created will have theirline weights, line types, text options, etc. defined by one seed file data-set. For example,Equipment Drawings will have exactly the same graphic symbology and dimensioningattributes as Structural Drawings, Piping Drawings, etc. For more information about theproject and alternate seed files, refer to Project Setup, page 459.

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so.During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working unitsused in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, withsubunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designatemaster units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This willensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.

For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions inWhole Millimeters, page 49.

For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator(PD_Project).

If you want different drawing types to have unique graphic symbology (line weights, types,etc.), text features (fonts, sizes, etc.) and dimensioning attributes (FT, IN versus ’, "), then thealternate seed file option should be used. Each drawing type may have its own unique seeddata which will be applied to all subsequently created drawings of that type. The alternateseed file is named draw_seed.<drawing type> and is stored in the project directory. You donot have to define an alternate seed file for every drawing type, only for those you intend touse.

The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note LibraryCL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for moreinformation.

For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use the alternate seed file, this option wouldcreate a file called draw_seed.3 in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 valueassigned to the equipment drawing type).

Once created, the seed data can be customized through the Project Data Manager option ofProject Administrator by selecting Seed, Revise Drawing Data, and the drawing type to becustomized. Only those drawing types which have been defined as Alternate Seed File typesare listed. Project Seedfile is also listed for those drawing types which do not have analternate. Once selected, the following 6 data types may be altered:

31

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Drawing Category Data

Graphic Symbology Data

Label Character Sizes

Drawing Annotation Options

Reference Database File Specifications

Hidden Line Symbology Data

If drawings have already been created before alternate seed data has beendefined, the new data may be updated in the existing drawings with thePropagate function in the Project Data Manager. (Please note that propagateonly works on: drawing annotation symbology, vector hidden line graphicssymbology, character sizes for labels, and drawing graphic symbology data.)The same is true if changes are made throughout the life of the project thatneed to be applied to existing drawing files.

32

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Drawing Categories________________

2.2.6 Drawing Categories

A category is an "alias" for the Microstation drawing level (1-63) in the drawing file; thecategory is a way of assigning a meaningful, name to a specific level so that the designer doesnot have to refer to the various drawing levels by number.

When a project is created, the Project Administrator copies the default drawing categorynames to the project directory. The name of the copied file is drwcats.txt. You can edit thisfile to change the names that are displayed for drawing categories.

Although you can modify the drawing category names, the meaning of aspecific category will not be altered by this change.

Drawing View Specific Labels ;Category 4Drawing View Identification Labels ;Category 5Coordinate Labels ;Category 7Dimensioning ;Category 9Revision Triangles and Revision Clouds ;Category 10Hold Clouds ;Category 11Reports ;Category 8Miscellaneous Drawing Graphics ;Category 3Non-Plotted Drawing Graphics ;Category 12VHL Plot Date ;Category 2Matchlines By System ;Category 1Title Block Data ;Category 6Battery Limits ;Category 36Matchlines By User ;Category 37Centerlines ;Category 38Dumb Details ;Category 39Leader Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 40Extension Lines for Dumb Details ;Category 41Dimensions for Dumb Details ;Category 42Coordinates for Dumb Details ;Category 43Like Line No Labels ;Category 44Like Equipment No Labels ;Category 45User-defined drawing annotation category 11 ;Category 46User-defined drawing annotation category 12 ;Category 47User-defined drawing annotation category 13 ;Category 48User-defined drawing annotation category 14 ;Category 49User-defined drawing annotation category 15 ;Category 50User-defined drawing annotation category 16 ;Category 51User-defined drawing annotation category 17 ;Category 52User-defined drawing annotation category 18 ;Category 53User-defined drawing annotation category 19 ;Category 54User-defined drawing annotation category 20 ;Category 55

Each drawing type can also have an alternate list of category names. The name of thealternate category list is dwg_text_<drawing type>, and it is stored in the project directory.You do not have to define an alternate drawing type file for every drawing type, although thisis an option.

The <drawing type> code listed value is defined in the Standard Note LibraryCL2000. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for moreinformation.

33

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ For example, if Equipment Drawings are to use an alternate drawing category list, a file calleddwg_text_3 must exist in the project directory (if 3 is the Code List 2000 value assigned to theequipment drawing type). This file must be created externally using a text editor. First, thecontents of the drwcats.txt file should be copied into the appropriately-named alternatedrawing category file. Then, you can edit this file to change the names that are displayed fordrawing categories.

If an alternate drawing category file does not exist in the project directory, or it has beennamed incorrectly, the default project category list will be used.

34

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Cells________________

2.2.7 Cells

Cells are used to repeatedly place "dumb" graphics (not associated with the project controldatabase) within drawings. Cells are created within MicroStation, and are used to placefrequently-used objects like the North arrow and the company logo into the drawing. Anotherexample of a cell is an eye-wash station; placing a cell representation of an eye-wash stationwould keep the desginer from drawing a new one each time one is placed in the drawing.

PDS delivers some cells for drawing annotation, found in the cell library\win32app\ingr\pdshell\cell\drawing.cel. This cell library is copied to the project directory bythe Project Administrator as a part of project creation. The drawing.cel library in the projectdirectory must be used for any cells which you intend to use for drawing annotation. TheDrawing Manager attaches this cell library each time you select a drawing for the purpose ofdrawing annotation, unless that drawing type has been set to use an alternate cell library.

When the Place Cell command is used, the system prompts you to select the appropriate cellfrom a list of cell descriptions. This list of descriptions is found in the file calleddwg_cell_list. This file contains two columns; column one is for the cell name, and columntwo is for the description. The descriptions may be edited to suit your needs, but do notchange the cell names.

Each drawing type may use an alternate drawing cell library. The library name and itsnetwork address are specified on the Project Setup form. You must specify the file namesfor any alternate cell libraries to be used; however, the cell description list for each alternatecell library will be named dwg_cell.<drawing type>, and they are stored in the projectdirectory. If a cell description list file an alternate cell library does not exist, the system willuse the default, dwg_cell_list.

The cell description list file follows this format:

FLOARR FLOW ARROW CELLNAR1 PLANT NORTH ARROWNAR2 N. ARROW UP RIGHTNAR3 N. ARROW UP LEFTNAR4 N. ARROW DOWN LEFTNAR5 N. ARROW DOWN RIGHTcl center linegradea grade at anglegradeh grade horizontal

For more information about cells, refer to Place Cell, page 333, or refer to the MicroStationdocumentation.

35


2.2.8 Database Tables

PDS stores information about the project and its models, drawings, drawing views, compositeviews, piping, equipment, components, etc. in a series of related database tables. Each time anew model is created, or a new piping component or piece of equipment is placed, or a newview is created, a new record is placed in the appropriate table(s).

This section includes and describes the tables from the Project Control Database Definitionthat are affected by the drawing process. These tables are stored in a file called project.ddl.

You may modify only the column name fields in the project.ddl file; do not edit anyother fields in the database definitions.

The project.ddl file classifies these tables according to the project hierarchy (modelmanagement data, then drawing management data). Each level of the project hierarchy hasfurther divisions (model management data has tables for engineering discipline data, designarea data, and model data).

The rest of this section provides the name and description of each table affected by thedrawing process.

For more detailed information about the Project Control Database, theproject.ddl file, and table information, refer to the Project Administrator(PD_Project) Reference Guide.

MODEL MANAGEMENT DATA

Engineering Discipline Data

table number = 111, (pdtable_111)

PDS allows up to 10 distinct disciplines per project. When a new discipline is added to theproject, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique indexnumber for that discipline (discipline_indx_no), and a 20-character discipline name(discipline_name).

Design Area Data

table number = 112 , (pdtable_112)

When a new design area is created, a new record is added to this table. The record includessuch items as the above-mentioned discipline index number (discipline_indx_no), a uniqueindex number for the area (area_index_no), and the volume coordinates for that design area

36

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Database Tables________________ (volume_low_x, volume_low_y, volume_low_z, volume_high_x, volume_high_y, andvolume_high_z).

Model Data

table number = 113 , (pdtable_113)

Model files are attached to drawings as reference files; each drawing may have up to 256reference model files attached. When a new model is created, a record of it gets added to thistable. The record includes such items as a unique index number for the model(model_index_no), the index numbers for the discipline and design area in which it resides(discipline_indx_no, and area_index_no), and the file location (path_name, andnetwork_address).

DRAWING MANAGEMENT DATA

Drawing Data


When a new drawing is created, a record is added to this table. The record includes suchitems as a unique index number for that drawing, the name of that drawing type, the approvalstatus for that drawing, and its revision information, default scale, size, and file location.

Drawing View Data


Each drawing may have up to 15 views. When a new drawing view is created, a new record isadded to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index number for that drawingview, the view number, view name, view scale, drawing index number, view coordinates, anddrawing view type.

Drawing View Reference Model Data


When a new drawing view is created, a new record is added to this table. This table willnever have more than 256 record entries for a specific drawing view, since the maximumnumber of models attached to a drawing is 256. The record includes the unique index numberof the drawing view (dwg_view_index_no), and the index number for the attached model(model_index_no).

37


Composite Drawing View Data


A composite view may consist of up to 10 sub-views. When a new composite view is created,a new record is added to this table. The record includes such items as a unique index numberfor that composite drawing view, the composite view number, the composite view name, thecomposite view scale, the index number of the associated drawing, and up to ten indexnumbers for the sub-views within the composite drawing view.

Drawing Revision Data


This table is used only if revision management data is used. When revision management datais entered into a drawing, a new record is added to this table. The record includes such itemsas the drawing index number, the revision index number, and the revision number, revisiondate, revised by, checked by, and revision description information as entered in the CreateDrawing form of Drawing Manager.

Drawing Setup Data


This table stores the default information about drawing types that is established using theProject Setup form. The record includes such items as the default size, scale, and seed file.

Reference Model Display Category SetupData


This table holds the default display status of drawing categories for reference models attachedto drawings. This data is established using the Drawing Manager’s Project Setup form.

Plotting Default Data


This table allows use of customized iparms files (for plotting with specific pen tables or forrotating plots, etc.).

38

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Standard Notes / Code Lists________________

2.2.9 Standard Notes / Code Lists

PDS uses code-listed standard notes to ensure that all users share common terms for use indrawing annotation. Code lists are also used to allow some of the Drawing Managerconventions to have revisable field names; for instance, Drawing Type is standard note 2000.The code-listed values for standard note 2000 are the "names" of the drawing types thatappear in the scroll list when the Create Drawing feature is used.

For more information about standard notes and code lists, refer to theReference Data Manager: Reference Guide.

2.2.10 Labels

Drawing Manager allows placement of name labels and coordinate labels for annotationpurposes. These labels are placed through the Drawing Manager interface and are"intelligent"; the labels will change if the item they describe changes, but only after one of theUpdate Labels commands have been exceuted.

"Dumb" text, text that has no association with the PDS database, can also be placed indrawings. Dumb text can be placed using the Place Text button in the Place Labels palette,or through "raw" MicroStation. For more information about labels, refer to AnnotatingDrawings, page 293, Update Labels, page 321, or Update Annotation Labels, page 379.

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so.During Project Setup, Project Administrator allows revision of working unitsused in creating a project. Master units in a Metric project are meters, withsubunits being millimeters; however, the project administrator can designatemaster units to be millimeters, with subunits set also to millimeters. This willensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.

For more information about this topic, refer to Displaying Dimensions inWhole Millimeters, page 49.

For more information about working units, refer to Project Administrator(PD_Project).

39


2.2.11 Drawing Manager’s Output

Drawing Manager’s outputs are plotted drawings and reports based on the drawings. Plottingor printing requires that queues be created so that Drawing Manager will know where to sendthe output.

Plots

Before plotting can be done, a plot queue must be established so that Drawing Manager willknow where to send the data to be plotted. For more information about plotting drawings,refer to Plot Manager, page 413.

Reports

Drawing Manager can generate reports based on the information written in the project controldatabase. Reports require a format file and a discrimination data file in order to specify theformat, content, and scope of reports generated. Reports can be saved as ASCII files, or theycan be sent to a printer.

Before reports can be printed, a print queue must be established so that Drawing Manager willknow where to send the data to be printed. For more information about creating reports, referto Report - Drawing Management Data, page 135 . You may also refer to the ReportManager User’s Guide for more detailed information about reporting capabilities.

40

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Customizing Drawing Manager________________

2.2.12 Customizing Drawing Manager

Many aspects of Drawing Manager can be customized to meet your specific requirements, andseveral of these procedures are discussed in this section. However, this section is not intendedto cover every 3D customization issue.

The following topics are discussed in this section:

Automatic Title Block Generation

Supplemental Title Block Data

Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters

You may refer to the index (under customization, among other keywords) for more topicsabout customizing this software.

41


2.2.12.1 Automatic Title Block Generation

MicroStation allows you to place text nodes in design files. Text nodes are pre-definedlocations for text to placed. They may be placed within the title block area of your borderfiles. The text nodes must be created within the drawing border prior to using the automatedtitle block feature.

You may place the text nodes on any level in the drawing border, but you mustensure that this level is not displayed so that the nodes will not be displayed onthe plotted drawing.

When the automatic title block option is executed, all text nodes in the titleblock will be replaced by the associated database string and user-defined text.This data will be created on a level associated with the Title Block Datacategory.

For more information about using text nodes, refer to the MicroStationdocumentation.

Within PD_Draw, the Create Drawing and Approve Drawing commands both provide anoption to load associated text into pre-defined text nodes in the title block of a drawing.

Both options depend on an ASCII file to associate each text node to a column in the ProjectControl Database. This ASCII file is called title_blk_<drawing type>, and should reside inthe project directory.

The following ASCII code will generate the data for a title block that contains the revisionnumber, revision date, revised by, checked by, and the revision description for the currentrevision and the five previous revisions. This ASCII file will also automatically generate thedrawing title, the initials of the person who approved the drawing, the approval date, theproject number, and the drawing number.

If the drawing revision date is to be loaded into the title block, it will bedisplayed in the format defined for the Project Seed File through Project DataManager.

42

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Automatic Title Block Generation________________

! Sample ascii file for automatic title block generation!! This file needs to be in the project directory in order to be used! by the title block load process. It should be named! title_blk_<drawing type>!! Format of file: Node, Table, Column, Prefix, Suffix, Revision_number!! Node: text node in border file! Table: pd_table number, or entity number! Column: column number, or attribute number! Prefix: hardcoded text prefix to be place before database data string! Suffix: hardcoded text suffix to be place after database data string! Revision_number: -nth revision (0 = most recent, -1 = second most recent,! .etc.)! NOTE: Dates are formatted according to type-63 data. Now modifiable in! the Project Data Manager.! Rev85,125,3, , ,-586,125,3, , ,-487,125,3, , ,-388,125,3, , ,-289,125,3, , ,-190,125,3, , ,0! Date91,125,4, , ,-592,125,4, , ,-493,125,4, , ,-394,125,4, , ,-295,125,4, , ,-196,125,4, , ,0! By97,125,5, , ,-598,125,5, , ,-499,125,5, , ,-3100,125,5, , ,-2101,125,5, , ,-1102,125,5, , ,0! Chk103,125,6, , ,-5104,125,6, , ,-4105,125,6, , ,-3106,125,6, , ,-2107,125,6, , ,-1108,125,6, , ,0! Description109,125,7, , ,-5110,125,7, , ,-4111,125,7, , ,-3112,125,7, , ,-2113,125,7, , ,-1114,125,7, , ,0!! Drawing Title115,121,3, , ,0! Project No118,101,2, , ,! Drawing No119,121,2, , ,!Approval 1 Initials200,125,8,,,0!Approval 1 Date

43

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ 201,125,13,,,0!Approval 2 Initials202,125,9,,,0!Approval 2 Date203,125,14,,,0!Approval 3 Initials204,125,10,,,0!Approval 3 Date205,125,15,,,0!Approval 4 Initials206,125,11,,,0!Approval 4 Date207,125,16,,,0!Supplemental Titleblock data300,121,25,,,0301,121,26,,,0302,121,27,,,0303,121,28,,,0304,121,29,,,0305,121,30,,,0306,121,31,,,0307,121,32,,,0308,121,33,,,0309,121,34,,,0

44

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

The ASCII Text Node Definition File________________

2.2.12.2 The ASCII Text Node Definition File

The ASCII file that defines the text nodes treats any text following an ! in the first column asdocumentation, and will ignore it.

The data string query will follow the format N,T,C,P,S,R followed by a carriage return,where:

N = the text node number. This corresponds to the text node placed in the drawingborder.

T = the PD_table number. This corresponds with pdtable_101 (Project DescriptionData), pdtable_121 (Drawing Data), pdtable_122 (Drawing View Data), andpdtable_125 (Drawing Revision Data).

C = column or attribute number. This corresponds with a database value within apdtable.

P = prefix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to precedethe database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.

S = suffix. This corresponds with user-specified text (up to 128 characters) to followthe database string. This field is optional, but a comma must be used as a delimiter.

R = the drawing revision number. This corresponds with the revision number data asfound in pdtable_125. This field is optional; if no value is entered, a default 0 for themost current revision (-1 is the previous revision number) will be used.

The following example defines the drawing number, drawing title, and revision number to beloaded into text nodes 2, 3, and 5:

2, 121, 2, Drawing Number:,,03, 121, 3, Title:,,05, 121, 11, ,,0

Although it is acceptable to have a text node in the drawing border without anassociated entry in the ASCII file, an error message will be generated if anentry is found in the ASCII file for which there is no associated text node.

Automatic Title Block Generation in CreateDrawing

The Create Drawing command will generate the title block information automatically if theASCII file for the appropriate drawing type resides in the project directory. If the ASCII filedoes not exist in the project directory, the automatic title block generation will not be enabledfor any drawing of that type.

45


Automatic Title Block Generation inApprove Drawing

The Approve Drawing command provides a toggle to explicitly select the option to generatethe title block information. If the ASCII file is found in the project directory, the toggle willbe set to the ON position. If the ASCII file is not found, the toggle will be disabled.

46

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Supplemental Title Block Data________________

2.2.12.3 Supplemental Title Block Data

Every drawing has data stored in attributes in the database (pdtable_121). The SupplementalTitle Block Data form lets you add additional attributes that are shown in the Border File.These attributes can also be revision attributes.

These values are recommended for new attributes when creating a drawing:

Custom_1 character(40) pdtable_121, column 25 for block mappingCustom_2 character(40) pdtable_121, column 26 for block mappingCustom_3 character(16) pdtable_121, column 27 for block mappingCustom_4 character(16) pdtable_121, column 28 for block mappingCustom_5 character(16) pdtable_121, column 29 for block mappingCustom_6 character(16) pdtable_121, column 30 for block mappingCustom_7 character(16) pdtable_121, column 31 for block mappingCustom_8 character(16) pdtable_121, column 32 for block mappingCustom_9 integer(date) pdtable_121, column 33 for block mappingCustom_10 integer(date) pdtable_121, column 34 for block mapping

For more information on title block data and text, refer to Automatic Title Block Generation,page 42.

47


2.2.12.4 Nominal Pipe Diameter Value

There is an option in the Project Administrator module which lets you display nominalpiping diameter values as you wish, for example, inches may be displayed as " or IN.

To define a value,

1. Select Project Administrator from the Plant Design System (PD_Shell) form.

The Project Administrator form displays.

2. Select Project Data Manager from the Project Administrator form.

The Project Data Manager form displays.

3. Select Seed from the Project Data Manager form.

The form displays the various seed files which can be revised/edited to suit your needs.

4. Select Drawing Data - Revise from the available files.

The Project Data Manager - Drawings form displays.

5. Select Graphic Symbology Data from the Project Data Manager - Drawings form.

The Graphic Symbology Data form displays.

6. Change the Field Name for Nominal Piping Diameter parameter and Accept theform.

If needed, this modification can apply to any project drawings you have already created. Justreturn to the display of seed files (step 4) and select the Drawing Data - Propagate option.This will change the NPD field on all existing drawings. For more information on thisfeature, see the Project Administrator Reference Guide.

48

2.Th

eory o

f O

peratio

n

Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters________________

2.2.12.5 Displaying Dimensions in Whole Millimeters

You can display dimensions as whole millimeters if you choose to do so. During ProjectSetup, Project Administrator allows revision of working units used in creating a project.Master units in a Metric project are meters, with subunits being millimeters; however, theproject administrator can designate master units to be millimeters, with subunits set also tomillimeters. This will ensure that dimensions will be read as millimeters, not meters.

Next, modify the drawing seed file through MicroStation; select Element, then slectDimensions, then select Units to activate the Units form.

Set Primary Units to Metric. Set Format to AEC. Set Accuracy to zero (0). Set Label tox1/2’. Select No Secondary Units.

The Units form with the appropriate settings is shown below.

This will display the dimension units in millimeters with no decimal places. For example,you wiil see 1927 mm instead of the default 1.927 m or 1927.0 mm.

For more information about working units, please refer to Project Administrator(PD_Project).

49


50

3.Draw

ing

M

anag

emen

t

Drawing Management________________

3. Drawing Management

The Drawing Manager option activates the Drawing Management form. It is used to createand manipulate drawings and drawing views for an existing model at any point in the designprocess. It also provides access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings.

Commands

Drawing Manager — Creates, copies, revises, and deletes drawings, drawing views,and reports.

Drawing Composition / Annotation — Activates the interactive graphicsenvironment for drawings. The Drawing Composition commands create, attach, andmodify drawing views. The Annotation commands place annotation graphics in thedrawing.

Update Annotation Labels — Updates annotation labels without requiring you toenter the graphics environment.

Vector Hidden Line Manager — Creates hidden-line-removed graphics for aspecified drawing.

Search Criteria for VHL — Creates the search criteria used for symbology basedVHL drawing creation.

51

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Plot Manager — Provides a PDS-specific interface for plotting drawings with a fulldisplay control including manipulation of reference files.

Project Planner — Creates and revises a Key Plan model file for the project andcreates unassigned drawing views.

Project Setup — Defines the default creation definitions based on the drawing type,reference models, drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined a projectsetup, the system only includes the default reference models and categories you specifywhen creating a drawing or drawing view. See the Group Workflow section in theUsing the Drawing Management Commands section that follows for information onwhen to use this command.

Plot Setup Manager — Creates, revises, and deletes I/Plot Parameter files.

52

3.Draw

ing

M

anag

emen

t

Using the Drawing Management Commands________________

3.1 Using the Drawing ManagementCommands

About Drawing Management

The Drawing Management options allow you to create and revise orthographic productiondrawings. They also allow you to create drawing views for these drawings. You can report ondrawing information in the Project Control Database and on model data in specified drawingsand drawing views. You can place annotation labels, create hidden-line-removed modelgraphics, and plot a drawing or set of drawings.

When to Use These Commands

You can create a drawing during any stage of the design process. It consists of the referencemodel attachments for the model graphics used in the drawing and the graphics for thedrawing itself. The model graphics reside in the design file for that model. These modelgraphics are attached to the drawing as reference files through the use of drawing views. Youcan also create up to 15 drawing views for each drawing.

Before Using These Commands

Besides the basic project setup which is explained in Chapter 1, there are a few steps that mustbe done prior to activating the Drawing Management options in order to use all of thefunctionality that they provide.

The Drawing Manager option provides access to the Report - Model Data option which isused to generate reports from models within a drawing using report definition data. Part ofthis definition data is a format file. The format file is not generated interactively within thePDS environment. A sample format file is provided in the \win32app\ingr\pdreport\sampledirectory. The format file is named piping_#.fmt. You should copy this file to the directoryyou will use for your report-related files. For more information on reporting and reportdefinition data, refer to Chapter 4.

Group Workflow

If you decide to use the Project Setup option to define defaults for the drawings and drawingviews that will be created during the project, you should use this command first. It allows youto define the default creation definitions based on the drawing type, reference models,drawing size, and drawing scale. Once you have defined the project setup, the system onlyincludes the default reference categories you have specified when creating a drawing ordrawing view. If you do not use this command, all reference categories are available eachtime you create a drawing or drawing view.

53

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ There is no particular workflow for the rest of the commands after the first drawing has beencreated. Of course, you must create a drawing before a drawing view can be created.

54

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Drawing Manager________________

4. Drawing Manager

This option activates the Drawing Manager form. It is also activated when the Report -Drawing Management Data option is selected. This form is used to create, revise, and deletedrawings and drawing views. It is also used to create and revise reports and to specifyapproval data for both drawings and reports. The following sections describe the basicoperations involved in creating and modifying drawings, drawing views, and reports.

Commands

Create — Creates drawings, drawing views, and composite drawing views. Alsocreates and composes drawing views and composite drawing views.

Revise — Revises drawing definitions, drawing views, graphic drawings, and plotplangraphics.

Delete — Deletes drawings and drawing views.

Report - Drawing Management Data — Creates reports on drawings in the project.

Report - Model Data — Defines and creates reports of model data in a specifieddrawing or drawing view.

Approve Drawing — Defines the drawing approval data for the production stages(creation/revision) of a project drawing.

55


Steps

1. Select the Drawing Manager option from the Drawing Management form.

The system activates the Drawing Manager form.

2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.

— OR —

Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Management form.

56

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Options________________

4.1 Create Options

This option activates the Create Options form. It is used to create and compose drawings,drawing views, and composite drawing views.

When a Create option is selected, the list of Drawing Types (Standard Note Type 2000) willbe displayed in a scroll list on the right.

For the complete list of delivered drawing types, refer to the Standard NoteLibrary Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager.

The names of the drawing types may be changed to suit your preferences. Thisis done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS ReferenceData Manager.

Commands

Create Drawing — Creates the drawing and specifies the drawing parameters.

Create Drawing View from ASCII File — Creates a drawing view from a user-defined ASCII file.

Copy Drawing — Copies a selected drawing into the specified directory on thespecified node.

Create Drawing View — Creates the drawing views for use by the drawing anddefines the parameters necessary to create the drawing view.

Copy Drawing View — Specifies the data required for copying drawing views fromone drawing to another or within the same drawing.

57

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Create Composite Drawing View — Creates a composite drawing view and definesthe parameters necessary to create it.

Steps

1. Select the Create option from the Drawing Manager form.

The system displays the Create Options form.

2. Select one of the Drawing Manager options.

For each of the Create options, the system displays the available Drawing types in thedisplay list.

3. Accept Or Select Option Or Drawing Type

Select the type of drawing to be used from the display list, and select Accept tocontinue.

The system displays the create form for the selected option and drawing type.

— OR —


Before creating drawings or view, refer to Project Setup, page 459 fordetailed information on attaching reference disciplines, etc.

58

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing________________

4.1.1 Create Drawing

This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using thedrawing filename and parameters specified. The illustrations in this section reflect aEquipment Arrangement Drawing type; however, the operation is the same for all drawingtypes.

The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer tothe PDS Project Administrator Reference Database User’s Guide for more information onproject creation.

Field Descriptions

Drawing Number — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define thedrawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created.

Special characters such as $ @ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to define thedrawing number.

Drawing Name — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define thelong name of the drawing file to be created.

Default Scale — Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawingscale options. Select the desired drawing scale value from the list.

English Units - m’ m"=n’ n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale onthe model. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1foot in the model.

59


— OR —

Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on themodel. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm inthe model.

Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. Forthe complete list of delivered drawing scale values, refer to theStandard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference DataManager.

The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences. Thisis done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDSReference Data Manager.

Drawing Size — Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawingborder size options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list.

Refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 29 for information on the drawing border referencefiles for the various sizes and drawing types.

English UnitsA 8 1/2 X 11B 11 X 17C 17 X 22D 22 X 34E 34 X 44F 28 X 40

Metric UnitsA0 840mm X 1189mmA1 595mm X 840mmA2 420mm X 595mmA3 297mm X 420mmA4 210mm X 297mm

Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1202. Thedrawing size values may be changed to suit your preferences. This isdone using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDSReference Data Manager.

Drawing File Name — The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characterstotal) as the drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number isgreater than 11 characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension.You can modify the Drawing File Name.

Drawing File Directory — Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawingfile.

60

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing________________ Workstation/Server Name — Key in the node address of the workstation to containthe drawing file.

Last Revision Number — This field displays the current revision number of thedrawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.

Revision Number — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revisionof the drawing. This field is optional.

Revised By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user whorevised the drawing. This field is optional.

Checked By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user whochecked the drawing. This field is optional.

Revision Description — Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide adescription of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.

Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to access the Supplemental TitleBlock Data form.

Steps

1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form.

The system displays the Create Drawing form.

2. Key in the drawing number and name information.

3. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices.Select the desired choice from the scroll list.

4. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information.

5. If revision management will be used, key in the revision management data.

6. Select the Supplemental Title Data Block button if you want to specify input data intonew attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title BlockData, page 47 .

7. Accept or Reject

Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept.

Creating Drawing

The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing designfile. It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field.

61


8. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.

62

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing from ASCII File________________

4.1.2 Create Drawing from ASCII File

This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to createdrawings and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define asmany drawings as necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing viewsfor every drawing. Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. Youcan select the active drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing managementdata of the Project Control Database. You can also submit the process immediately or selectdelayed batch processing. This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing.

The batch process returns a mail message which reports any errors that occurred during thecreation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created,and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, therelated drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create DrawingView command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specifiedreference model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you amail message indicating which reference models were not attached.

The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.

63


Commands

Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time — Submits or delayssubmission of the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, thesystem displays time fields which allow you to delay submission until a moreconvenient time.

Field Definitions

ASCII File Name — Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing.This file contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views.

Directory — Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides.

Network Address — Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.

Before using this command

You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the rightof the colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number toNetwork_Address is information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a newdrawing. Every drawing view is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Eachdrawing view must be associated with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Modelsis information defining a drawing view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing viewswith one ASCII file.

Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below.

Drawing_Number:00ascii02Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation!Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each!drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields!is related to the proceeding drawing name.Default_Scale:3/8"=1’Drawing_Size:1File_Spec:draw005.dgnPath_Name:c:\newpipe\Network_Address:deason!Next line begins drawing view definitionView_Number:d0005View_Name:Plan!This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02!ASCII Creation drawing.View_Scale:3/8"=1’Orientation:1Easting_Low:1358:0

64

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing from ASCII File________________ Northing_Low:415:0Elevation_Low:9:11Easting_High:1376:0Northing_High:433:0Elevation_High:27:11Composition_Point:5Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01

File Field Definitions

Drawing_Number: — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define thedrawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case lettersonly. Special characters such as $ - / = # * and a blank space cannot be used to definethe drawing number.

Drawing_Name: — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define thelong name of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional.

Default_Scale: — Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the defaultscale is used.

Drawing_Size: — Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to theDrawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on thedrawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standardnote value and not the standard note text must be used in this field. This value can befound in Standard Note 1202.

File_Spec: — Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure toinclude the .dgn extension.

Path_Name: — Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a valueis not specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in theProject Setup command.

Network_Address: — Key in the network address where the drawing design fileresides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the dataspecified in the Project Setup command.

View_Number: — Key in a drawing view number for this drawing.

View_Name: — Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view.

View_Scale: — Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword ismissing, the default scale for the drawing is used.

Orientation: — Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use thestandard note text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620.

Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low — Key in the absolute Easting,Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the formX’ X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point ornegative elevation.)

65


The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format thatMicroStation will accept for keyed-in dimension data. For example, thevalue for two feet, six and one half inches may be expressed as 0:30.5,2’6.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5", or 2.55’.

Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High — Key in the absoluteEasting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube.This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.

Composition Point — Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to acomposition point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for right-bottom, or 5 for center composition.

This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if youdo not wish to assign a value to it.

Reference_Models: — Key in the reference model numbers as used in the modelmanagement data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with acomma. The maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will befollowed by another line of model numbers with a dash (-) to define more referencemodels. Each drawing created from an ASCII file must have at least one value for thiskeyword.

Other Valid Keywords

You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions.

Saved_View: — This keyword allows you to create drawing views using data fromexisting saved views.

The syntax for this keyword is:

Saved_View:model number,saved view name,OPTION

The model number setting specifies the model that contains the saved view. Thissetting is case sensitive. The saved view name setting defines the saved viewfrom which to read data when creating the new drawing view. This setting is not casesensitive. The OPTION setting specifies whether or not models attached to the sourceview will also be attached to the created view. The valid values for this setting areALL, which attaches all the models, and NO_ATTACHED, which attaches none of themodels. The default setting is ALL.

If any of the clipping coordinates or view orientation are specified in theASCII file after the saved_view keyword, those settings override thesettings in the saved view.

For example, in the drawing view generated using the following ASCIIfile, the Easting coordinate would be 100, and the drawing vieworientation would be Top, regardless of the Easting High andOrientation settings in the saved view.

66

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing from ASCII File________________ saved_view:model1,ram1,ALLEasting_High:100:0Orientation:1

MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE — You may add keywords to the ASCII filethat specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated ontothemselves) or just "sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view.The default is that drawings will be created with propagated structural models;however, the keywords MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be includedwithin the drawing view definition before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword tospecify which type to attach.

The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been selectedwithin the ACSII file, but has not been defined within the model management data ofthe Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations:

1. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; thiswould mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for thesparse models exist in PD_Table 113.

2. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but nomodels have yet been created.

The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creatingonly drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse).If no keyword is used, by default the drawing views will be created usingpropagated structural models.

MATCHLINES — You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automaticallycreate match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawingview.

If prompted to... Do this:

Keyin Data or Select Option Key in the file specifications, then set the submit toggleto the desired setting. Select Accept to create thedrawing(s) and drawing view(s) with the specifiedASCII file.

If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view isassociated and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. Inthis situation, you must create the desired drawing view manually.

If a reference model can not be attached, an error will be reported to youthrough the mail message, and the drawing view will be not be created.

In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, goto the Revise Drawing form and select Load Title Block.

67


4.1.3 Copy Drawing

This option is used to copy the information about one drawing so it may be modified for useas another drawing. Selecting the Copy Drawing option activates the Drawing Type scrolllist. The system then expects you to select a drawing type before further action can be taken.

Once a drawing type is selected and accepted, the system will activate the Select Drawingform. Once a drawing has been selected and accepted, the system displays the CopyDrawing form.

When a drawing is copied, the source drawing will be automatically attachedas a reference file to the destination drawing for the purpose of sharingannotation. Drawing annotation, revision clouds and triangles, and vectorhidden line graphics will not be copied into the destination drawing.

Drawings with rotated views should not be copied, as it will produce incorrectresults.

Commands

Select All Views — Highlights all available views to be copied into the destinationdrawing.

Clear All Views — Clears all views so that none are copied into the destinationdrawing.

Drawing View Data — Activates the Drawing View Data form. It is used to revisethe definition data for drawing views. For more information about this option, refer toDrawing View Data, page 71.

68

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Copy Drawing________________

Field Descriptions

SOURCE DATA

Project — Displays the name of the project

Drawing Type — Displays the name of the drawing to be copied. If a data point isplaced in this field, the Drawing Type scroll list will be activated so that a differentdrawing type can be selected for copying.

Drawing Number — Displays the number of the drawing to be copied. If a data pointis placed in this field, the Drawing Number scroll list will be activated so that adifferent drawing can be selected for copying.

DESTINATION DATA

Drawing Type — Displays the drawing type of the destination drawing. The defaultwill be the drawing type of the copied drawing. To change the drawing type of thedestination drawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of allpossible drawing types.

Drawing Number — Key in the drawing number to represent the destination drawing.

Drawing Name — Displays the drawing name of the destination drawing. The nameof the source drawing will remain until another name is keyed into the field.

Drawing Default Scale — Displays the drawing scale of the destination drawing. Thedefault will be the scale of the copied drawing. To change the scale of the destinationdrawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possibledrawing scales.

Drawing Default Size — Displays the drawing size of the destination drawing. Thedefault will be the size of the copied drawing. To change the size of the destinationdrawing, place a data point in the field. This will display the scroll list of all possibledrawing sizes.

Drawing File Name — Displays the file name of the destination drawing. The filename of the source drawing will remain until another file name is keyed into the field.

Drawing File Directory — Displays the directory path of the destination drawing. Thedirectory of the source drawing will remain until another directory path is keyed intothe field.

Workstation/Server — Displays the workstation/server name of the destinationdrawing. The workstation/server name of the source drawing will remain until anotherworkstation/server name is keyed into the field.

69

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ If prompted to... Do this:

You must activate all fields that expect keyed-in data and press <RETURN> ineach one before the entire form can be accepted.

Specify Drawing Number Place a data point in the Drawing Number field, thenkey in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify thedestination drawing.

Specify Drawing Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe thedestination drawing.

Specify Design File Name Key in the file name for the design file.

You must follow the filename convention of filename.ext, where the filenamecannot exceed 8 characters and is followed by a period (.) and a 3-characterextension.

Specify Destination DirectoryKey in the path to the directory in which you want the file to reside.

Specify Network AddressKey in the network address of the machine in which you want the file to reside.

Specify Drawing View DataSelect Drawing View Data, to specify and name the drawing views to be copied intothe destination drawing. This form also allows you to specify reference models to becopied.

70

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Drawing View Data________________

4.1.3.1 Drawing View Data

This option activates the Drawing View Data form. This form allows you to specify theviews that will be copied into the destination drawing. You may change the name andnumber of the views being copied into destination drawing, and you may add or removereference models to or from specific drawing views.

Commands

Select All Views — This command highlights all displayed views for copying into thedestination drawing.

Clear All Views — This command prohibits all views in the display list from beingcopied into the destination drawing.

Add/Delete Reference Models — This command allows you to add or removereference models to or from specific views as they are copied into the destinationdrawing.

Attach Model activates a discipline list that allows you to select which disciplines’ datawill be copied into the destination drawing view. When a discipline is selected andaccepted, the system prompts you to select the areas that encompass the desiredreference models. You may either select all models within an area (Attach by Area),or you may select specific models within areas (Select Models).

Detach Model removes the selected model, after confirmation, from the referencemodel list.

Auto Attach/Verify activates a the Pre-Defined/All Disciplines toggle. Depending onthe setting of this toggle, acceptance of this form displays a list of reference modelseither from all disciplines, or from only the pre-defined disciplines for that drawingtype. You may select specific reference models from the list by placing a data button

71

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ on the appropriate models, or you can automatically select all models by selecting theSelect All command.


Enter New View Number and New View NamePlace data points in the appropriate fields so that youmay specify the name and number for the destinationviews. Highlighted views will be copied; to keep aview from being copied, place a data point on it so thatit will no longer be highlighted.

Views being copied into the destination drawing must have a unique viewname.

Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline that contains the area that containsthe drawing view to be copied.

Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the drawing view to becopied.

Select Drawing View Select a drawing view that contains a model to attach (ordetach) to the destination drawing view, then selectAccept.

Select Model Select a model to attach (or detach) to the destinationdrawing view (or select Select All to select all modelson the list, then select the appropriate command (AttachModel or Detach Model).

— OR —

Select Auto Attach/Verify to get a complete list ofreference models from all disciplines, or from only thepre-defined disciplines for that drawing type.

Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and AcceptPlace a data button on the toggle to change its value tothe desired setting.

72

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Drawing View________________

4.1.4 Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawingview by:

using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model,

selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used,

or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for aspecified named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for thedrawing view and defines the orientation.


If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created inthe model before selecting this command.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number(short code - up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The systemverifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project.

View Name — Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (longdescription - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.

View Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify anew scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the valueused when the drawing was created.

73

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Drawing View Volume — Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for opposite corner points for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use anegative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Commands

Place Match Lines / No Match Lines — Places match lines and the correspondingcoordinate labels when the drawing view is created. This option is only available forplan or rotated plan views. The match lines will be placed at the clipping boundaries ofthe drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels will be placed parallel to eachmatch line on the side away from the contents of the drawing views.

The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a unique drawingcategory, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement, the user-defined drawing annotation category that was previously called Match Lines isnow called Match Lines by User.

The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the CoordinateLabels category, as are all other coordinate labels.

The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawing view’sclipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management data of the ProjectControl Database. A line spacing factor specified for this option throughProject Data Manager will determine the distance between the match line andthe coordinate label.

These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and they will beappropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the Revise Drawing View orMove Drawing View commands are used.

Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default linespacing for all other coordinate labels will be used.

The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label’s text will bedetermined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project DataManager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If the coordinate label doesnot have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbology data for the defaultcoordinate label will be used.

The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following defaultvalues until you specify different values through Project Data Manager:

— level = 1

— color = 0 (white)

— weight = 0

74

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er


— line style = 0

Named Item — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 77 for moreinformation.

Saved View — Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clippingvolume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 83 for more information.

Define View Location — Defines the location of the drawing view within thedrawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define ViewLocation, page 84 for more information.

Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should usethe Define View Location command between defining the view parametersand confirming the form.


Specify Drawing View NumberKey in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify thedrawing view to be created.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe thedrawing view to be created.

Select Drawing View OrientationSelect one of the seven view orientation options fromthe center of the form.

Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the clippingvolume. (The system does not have to have the Lowcoordinates in the Low field and the High coordinates inthe High field; the command will work properly as longas the coordinated entered are diagonally opposed.)

— OR —

Select the Named Item option to use the datacoordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view. Refer toNamed Item, page 77 for more information.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a saved view modelto define the orientation and clipping volume of thedrawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 83 for moreinformation.

75


Accept or Select Other OptionsSelect Accept to continue.

Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the drawingview, and select Accept to continue.

When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models forthe selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference modelsin the chosen area.

Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the modelfiles for a specified area or to Select Models to specifythe individual reference models to be attached.

Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawing view.

The system uses the default model data categories defined using the ProjectSetup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the modelsselected. If no defaults are set, the system displays all categories.

76

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Named Item________________

4.1.4.1 Named Item

This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to definethe data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.

Before Using This Option

The view number and name of the drawing view to be created must be specified on theCreate Drawing View form.

You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define thedata coordinates and clipping volume.

Field Descriptions

Delta Coordinates — Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cubewhich fits the named item. When you select a model, its delta coordinates are displayedautomatically. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayedclipping volume.

Drawing View Volume — Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for diagonally-opposed corners of the cube in the form X’ X". (You canuse a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Commands

Select By Model — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, andthe system displays the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select amodel, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component touse. The system searches the selected model for that component.

77

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Select By Project — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enterthe item number. The system searches the entire project for that component.


Specify Component Number Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to theappropriate setting, then select one of the Numbercommands to specify a named item.

See the Named Item by Model, page 234, and Named Item by Project, page 236, sections formore information.

78

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Named Item by Model________________

4.1.4.1.1 Named Item by Model



You must know the item number of the component you are going to use to define thedelta coordinates and clipping volume.

Commands

Select By Project — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enterthe item number. The system will search the entire project for that component.

Piping Component Number — Defines the type of named item as a pipingcomponent, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area thatcontains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted,you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.

Instrument Component Number — Defines the type of named item as an instrumentcomponent, then activates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area thatcontains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted,you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.

Equipment Number — Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, thenactivates a series of forms that prompt you to select the area that contains the model thatcontains the named item. Once an area is selected and accepted, you must then specifythe component number for the specific named item.

79

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Equipment Number & Nozzle Number — Defines the type of named item as anequipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that prompt you toselect the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area isselected and accepted, you must then specify the component number for the specificnamed item.

Select Model — Changes the model after one has already been selected through one ofthe Number options.

Field Descriptions

Delta Coordinates — Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cubewhich fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its deltacoordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the DeltaCoordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.

Drawing View Volume — Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use anegative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Defines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the secondcorner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first cornerpoint.


Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that contains thenamed item, and select Accept.

Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item, andselect Accept.

Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field left of the model-namedisplay field, key in the appropriate item number for thecomponent in the model and select and press <Enter>.

For an Equipment Number & Nozzle Number entry, enter the equipmentnumber followed by a slash (/) and then the nozzle number, for instance,equipnum/nozzlenum.

80

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Named Item by Project________________

4.1.4.1.2 Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the deltacoordinates and clipping volume for the drawing view.




Commands

Select By Model — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides within a selected model. First, you select one of the Number options, thesystem will display the appropriate Area and Model display lists. After you select amodel, its number is displayed and you must enter the item number of component touse. The system will search the selected model for that component.

Piping Component Number — Defines the type of named item as a pipingcomponent.

Instrument Component Number — Defines the type of named item as an instrumentcomponent.

Equipment Number — Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.

Equipment Number & Nozzle Number — Defines the type of named item as anequipment item with a nozzle item.

81


Field Descriptions





Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriateitem number to specify either the Piping ComponentNumber, Instrument Component Number,Equipment Number, or Equipment Number &Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.


82

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Saved View________________

4.1.4.2 Saved View

This option creates a drawing view using a model saved view to define the orientation,clipping volume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models are not filtered on thebasis of the discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, are availableregardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view.

When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement,the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawingview is created. Otherwise, it attaches the reference models associated with the model at thetime the saved model view was created. You can revise the reference model attachments.



A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modelingtasks.


Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline containing the model with the savedview, and select Accept.

Select Area or Exit Select the area containing the model with the savedview, and select Accept.

Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be created, andselect Accept.

Select Saved View Select the saved view name for the drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.

83


4.1.4.3 Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of adrawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes itautomatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border isspecified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to theDrawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.



Commands

Upper Left — Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Upper Right — Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Center — Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.

Lower Left — Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Lower Right — Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of thedrawing view border.

84

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Define View Location________________

Field Descriptions

x1 — Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

y1 — Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

x2 — Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

y2 — Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distancefrom the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b asdescribed in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.


Specify Drawing View LocationPlace a data point on the button representing thequadrant where the drawing should be placed.

85


4.2 Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawingview for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views tobe copied.

When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of adifferent drawing type, this command will attach the disciplines as specifiedfor the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager.

Do not copy rotated views, since the drawing orientation is not stored in the database.If you do copy a rotated view, the resulting view will not be rotated. Isometric viewscan be copied, so this warning does not apply to them.

Field Descriptions

Source Data

Drawing Type — Displays the discipline of the drawing selected.

Drawing Number — Displays the drawing number selected.

View Number — Select a view number from a list of existing drawing views for theselected drawing.

Destination Data

Drawing Number — Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawing whichwill receive the new drawing view.

86

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Copy Drawing View________________ Drawing View Number — Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) forthe drawing view to be created.

Drawing View Name — Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for thenew drawing view.

Drawing View Scale — Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.

Composition Options

Define Location — Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawingborder and composes the drawing view automatically. See Define View Location, page84 for more information.

Do Not Compose — Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. Theview will not be displayed in graphics.

Compose Coincident — Defines the composition point of the destination drawingview to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copiedfrom a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location inthe destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for thesource drawing is not defined, this option is not active.

This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotationoption. See Overlay Drawing, page 338 for more information.






87





— level = 1


— weight = 0

— line style = 0


Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the drawing viewto be copied.

Specify Drawing View NumberPlace a data point in the Drawing View Number: fieldand key in the drawing view number (up to 24characters) for the drawing view to be created.

The view number must be unique within the project. If you key in a numbercurrently in use, the system will display an error message informing you thatthe view number is not unique.

Specify Drawing View Name Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: field andkey in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) forthe new drawing view.

Accept to Copy Drawing ViewSelect Accept to copy the drawing view.

88

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Composite Drawing View________________

4.3 Create Composite Drawing View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create acomposite view and attach reference model files to individual drawing views within thecomposite drawing view.

The composite drawing view is the composite of up to ten drawing views and its volume isthe composite volume of those views. You can define each of the individual views by:

Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume(cube) in the model design file.

Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The savedview definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.

For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.

Commands

Orientation — Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of thedrawing view.



89

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in the CoordinateLabels category, as are all other coordinate labels.






— level = 1


— weight = 0

— line style = 0

Define Views for Composite Drawing View — Defines, revises, or rejects drawingviews for the composite drawing view. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View,page 244 for more information.

Define View Location — Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within thedrawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define ViewLocation, page 84 for more information.

Field Descriptions

Composite View Number — Key in the composite drawing view number (short name- up to 24 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The systemverifies that the number is unique within the project.

90

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Composite Drawing View________________ Composite View Name — Key in the view name (long description - up to 40characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view.

Composite View Scale — The scale value specified when the drawing was created isautomatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select fromthe available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawingview.


Specify Drawing View NumberKey in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identify thecomposite drawing view to be created.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describe thecomposite drawing view to be created.

Select Drawing View OrientationSelect one of the seven view orientation options fromthe center of the form.

Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawingviews for the composite drawing view. See DefineViews for Composite Drawing View, page 93 for moreinformation.

— THEN —

Select Accept for all of the specified views for thecomposite drawing view to be created.

Accept or Select Another OptionSelect the Define View Location option to pre-definethe location of the drawing view within the drawingborder and have the drawing view composedautomatically.

— THEN —

Select Accept for all of the specified views for thecomposite drawing view to be created.

Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the areathat contains the models to be attached.

Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specifiedarea or to Select Models to specify the individual reference models to beattached.


91



Steps

1. Select Create Composite Drawing View.

2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Types list, and Accept.

3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.

The system activates the Create Composite Drawing View form.

4. Select the Composite View Number field and key in the number (up to 24 alphanumericcharacters). The system verifies that the number is unique within the project.

5. Select the Composite View Name field and key in the name (up to 40 characters).

6. Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, andAccept.

7. Select one of the Orientation options to specify the viewing direction of the drawingview.

92

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Define Views for Composite Drawing View________________

4.3.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject individualdrawing views for the composite drawing view.

Commands

Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View — Defines the clipping volumefor a drawing view using a model saved view. See Define Composite Drawing Viewswith Saved View, page 95 for more information.

Reject View — Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.

Field Descriptions

Drawing Views — Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time adrawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updatesthis field. You may define up to ten views.

Drawing View Volume — Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use anegative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the secondcorner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first cornerpoint.

93

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ If prompted to... Do this:

Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates asfollows to define the individual drawing views for thecomposite drawing view.

Key in each coordinate individually or select the SavedView option to use a model saved view to define theclipping volume for a drawing view. See DefineComposite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95for more information.

— OR —

Select a drawing view and select the Reject View todelete the view from the selected composite drawingview.

Accept or Select Another OptionSelect Accept for all of the view definitions.

When this form is accepted, the system creates the composite drawing view inthe database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment for thefirst saved model view definition specified is used to position the compositedrawing view during drawing composition. The system determines thelocation of the remaining reference file attachments for the correspondingsaved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment.The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views isdetermined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used todefine the viewing direction and the clipping limits.

94

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View________________

4.3.1.1 Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View

The Saved View option is used to specify a model saved view to define the clipping volumeof a drawing view that is being added to a composite drawing view.

You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing Views field is updated aseach view is created.


The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified.


Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline for the composite drawing view tobe created, and select Accept.

Select Area or Exit Select the area for the composite drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.

Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.

The system uses the default model data categories defined using the ProjectSetup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the modelsselected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories that areactive in the selected models.

Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define theclipping volume of the composite drawing view, andselect Accept.

95


4.3.2 Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individualdrawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is thecomposite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.

You’ll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:

And this is how you want the drawing file to look.

96

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Create Composite Drawing Views Example________________

Before you create the composite drawing view, you’ll need to know the coordinates forall volumes to be used.

Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will definethe absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points forthe volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.(You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negativeelevation.)

The individual views can overlap each other.

97


Create composite drawing view name andnumber:


2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and Accept.

3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and Accept.



6. Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, andAccept.


98

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er


Define the views to be used in thecomposite drawing view:

1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the compositedrawing view.

You can define the views in one of two ways:

By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (asspecified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying theclipping volume.

By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model.The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.

To define the views by specifying theclipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawingview to be used in the composite drawing view, then Accept.

2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawingview, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the composite drawingview.

The Drawing Views field displays the drawing views as they aredefined. Each time a drawing view volume for a drawing view isdefined, the system automatically updates this field.

3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.

99


4. Confirm the form that appears, and the system updates the database.

To define the views by specifying a savedview:

The saved views must already exist.

1. Select Saved View.

2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and Accept.

3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and Accept.

4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and Accept.

5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, andAccept.

6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the compositedrawing view, then Accept. You can define up to ten views to be used in the compositedrawing view.


7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Acceptthe form.

The system updates the database.

8. Exit the form that appears.

100

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er


Attach the drawing view models, andcomplete the composite drawing view:

1. Select the discipline and Accept.

2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to beattached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), thenAccept.

3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawingview, then Accept.

4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.

101


4.4 Revise Options

This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the databaseinformation for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.

Commands

Revise Drawing — Revise drawing attributes.

Revise Drawing View — Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.

Steps

1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form.

The system displays the Revise Options form.

2. Select one of the Revise options.

For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined inStandard Note 2000) in a display list.

102

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Options________________


Select the type of drawing to use from the display list, and select Accept to continue.

The system displays the associated Revise form for the selected drawing type.

— OR —

Select Cancel to return to the Drawing Manager form.

103


4.4.1 Revise Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of anexisting drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing.First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the ReviseDrawing form which revises an existing drawing.

Field Descriptions

Drawing Number — Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, thenkey in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change thedrawing number.

Drawing Name — Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then keyin the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawingname.

Completion Status — Place a data point in the field and key in a number for thepercentage complete.

Default Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and selectfrom the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale.

Previous Revision Number — This field displays the current revision number of thedrawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.

Current Revision Number — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identifythis revision of the drawing. This field is optional.

Revised By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user whorevised the drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. TheRevised By field is optional.

104

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Drawing________________ Checked By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user whochecked the drawing. You can also key in the date in the corresponding Date field. TheChecked By field is optional.

Approved By (1-4) — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the userwho approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved Byfields are optional.

Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However,the Approve Drawing form is still available as well.

Revision Description — Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide adescription of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.

Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block — Set this toggle to Load Title Block ifyou want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawingis approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this informationto the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.

Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to display the Supplemental TitleBlock Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for moreinformation on the Supplemental Title Block Data.

Steps

1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form.

The system displays the Drawing Types.

2. Accept or Select Option or Drawing Type

Select a drawing type from the display list, and select Accept.

The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings definedfor the project.

3. Select Drawing

Select the drawing to be revised, and select Accept.

The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for thespecified drawing.

4. Select Attribute for Revision

Place a data point in the fields and modify the necessary attributes.


105


6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data intonew attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title BlockData, page 47.

7. Accept the drawing revisions.

The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form isupdated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes.

8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the ReviseOptions form.

106

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Drawing View________________

4.4.2 Revise Drawing View

This option activates the Revise Drawing View form. It is used to revise the definition of anexisting drawing view. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specifieddrawing view. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list as shown on theleft. After a drawing has been selected and confirmed, the system displays the ReviseDrawing View form which revises an existing drawing as shown on the right. This form maybe used to modify the model category data, change the clipping volume and orientation, anddefine reference model attachments for a drawing view.

The system automatically defines a display depth large enough to display thedrawing view graphics.

Commands

Revise Drawing View Data — Revises the drawing view attributes. The operatorsequence for this option varies, depending on the view selected. If a composite drawingview is selected, you can modify each view within the drawing view.

Revise Orientation — Revises the viewing direction of the drawing view.

Reference Models — Revises or reviews the reference model attachments.

Steps

1. Select Option

Select the Revise Drawing View option from the Revise Options form.

The system activates the Drawing Types display list.

107


2. Accept Or Select Option or Drawing Type


The system displays a list of all the drawings defined for the project.

3. Select Drawing


The system displays a list of the available drawing views for the selected drawing.

4. Select Drawing View

Select the View Number to be revised.

5. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option to change the drawing view attributes.The operator sequence for this option varies depending on the view selected. If acomposite drawing view is selected, you can modify each view within the drawingview. Refer to Revise Drawing View Data, page 109 or Revise Composite DrawingView Data, page 112 for more information.

— OR —

Select the Revise Orientation option to change the viewing direction of the drawingview. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 116 for more information.

— OR —

Select the Reference Models option to revise or review the reference modelattachments. Refer to Reference Models, page 118 for more information.

108

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Drawing View Data________________

4.4.2.1 Revise Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to modify the drawingview number, name, scale or clipping volume information.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Place a data point in the field and delete the current number, then keyin the new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the viewnumber.

View Name — Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key inthe new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the view name.

View Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and selectfrom the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing view scale.

English Units - m’ m"=n’ n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale onthe model. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1foot in the model. The scale factors are stored in the Standard Note Library.

— OR —

109

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on themodel. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm inthe model.

Drawing View Volume — Place a data point in the field and key in modifications tothe clipping volume for the specified drawing view.

Commands

Place Match Lines / No Match Lines — Places match lines and the correspondingcoordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed atthe clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels willbe placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawingviews.








level = 1color = 0 (white)weight = 0 line style = 0

110

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Drawing View Data________________

Steps

1. Select the Revise Drawing View Data option and a drawing view from the ReviseDrawing View form.

The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filledin for the specified drawing view.



3. Accept the specified revisions.

The system processes the data, and updates the database. When the view scale isrevised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View Database Table so that anydrawing view scale displayable attribute labels in the drawing for this drawing viewcan be updated.

If the drawing view is composed, the drawing graphics will be updated.

4. Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.

You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting another optionon the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Revise Orientation, page 116 or ReferenceModels, page 118 for more information.

111


4.4.2.2 Revise Composite Drawing View Data

This option activates the Revise Composite Drawing View Data form. It is used to modifythe composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation. You can also modify theclipping volume by modifying individual drawing views within the composite drawing view.

Commands

Redefine Individual Views — Redefines the individual drawing views within thecomposite drawing view. See Redefine Individual Views, page 114 for moreinformation.

Orientation — Defines the drawing view orientation.

Field Descriptions

Composite View Number — Place a data point in the field and delete the currentnumber, then key in the new view number. You can key in up to 24 characters tochange the composite view number.

Composite View Name — Place a data point in the field and delete the current name,then key in the new view name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change thecomposite view name.

Composite View Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list,and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed compositeview scale.

112

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Composite Drawing View Data________________

Steps

1. Select Revise Drawing View Data and a composite drawing view from the ReviseDrawing View form.

The system activates the Revise Drawing View Data form with the current values filledin for the specified composite drawing view.



3. Select a new drawing view Orientation if necessary.

4. Accept the specified revisions.

— OR —

Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing viewswithin the composite drawing view. See the Redefine Individual Views section for moreinformation.

— THEN —

5. Accept all of the specified views for the composite drawing view being revised. Thesystem revises the composite drawing view in the database and updates the drawingview in the drawing.

113


4.4.2.2.1 Redefine Individual Views

This option activates the Redefine Individual Views field, which is used to revise individualviews in a composite drawing view.

Commands

Saved View — Uses a saved view model to redefine the orientation and clippingvolume of the drawing view.

Reject View — Deletes as many of the individual views from the composite drawingview as specified.

Field Descriptions

Drawing Views — Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time adrawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updatesthis field.

Drawing View Volume — Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use anegative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Redefines the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the secondcorner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first cornerpoint.

114

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Redefine Individual Views________________

Steps

1. Select the Redefine Individual Views option to modify the individual drawing viewswithin the composite drawing view.

The system displays the Redefine Individual Views form.

2. Select the drawing view to be revised.

— THEN —

Specify Clipping Volume

The system automatically defines a display depth large enough todisplay the drawing view graphics.

Key in all of the Drawing View Volume coordinates as follows to define the individualdrawing views for the composite drawing view.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the clipping volumefor a drawing view. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95for more information.

3. Accept the displayed values to define a view.

The system updates the Drawing Views field with the view information, and clears theDrawing View Volume block for the next view definition.

4. Select a drawing view and select the Reject View to delete the view from the selectedcomposite drawing view.

5. Repeat the steps 2 through 3 to specify the individual clipping volume coordinates to beused in the next view. You can specify as many as ten views.

6. Accept the displayed clipping volume values for each drawing view, and select Cancelto exit the Drawing View Volume field.

115


4.4.2.3 Revise Orientation

This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the viewing directionfor the active drawing view.

Commands

Orientation — Defines the drawing view orientation with one of the seven standardorientation buttons.

Rotated View — Defines the drawing view orientation that does not apply to one of theseven standard orientations.

The Rotated View option will not work on skewed drawing views.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Displays the currently selected view number.

View Name — Displays the currently selected view name.

Steps

1. Select the Revise Orientation option from the Revise Drawing View form to changethe viewing direction of the specified drawing view.

The system activates the Revise Orientation form with the current drawing view datadisplayed, and the active orientation for the specified drawing view is highlighted.

116

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Orientation________________

2. Select Drawing View Orientation

The system automatically defines a display depth large enough todisplay the drawing view graphics.

Select one of the standard orientations to specify the new orientation. Go to Step 4.

— OR —

Select the Rotated View orientation to display an orientation that does not apply to oneof the seven standard orientations.

The system displays the rotate options.

3. Select the Model Axis and key in the degrees to rotate about that axis.

4. Accept the new orientation.

Following successful completion, the system displays the message UpdatedOrientation.

Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing View form.

You can revise additional information for the specified view by selecting one of theother options on the Revise Drawing View form. Refer to Reference Models, page 118or Revise Drawing View Data, page 109 for more information.

117


4.4.2.4 Reference Models

This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to copy and attach referencemodels and add, remove, and review reference model categories.

Commands

Display / Snap / Locate — These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate featuresto either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, andthey only appear when a reference model is selected from the list.

Display On / Off controls whether or not the selected reference model(s) will displayon the screen and on plotted drawings.

Snap On / Off controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selectedreference model(s).

Locate On / Off controls whether or not the user can copy database information fromthe reference model(s) into the active file.

Apply to Active / Discipline / All — Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate togglesettings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the samediscipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.

Copy From Active Drawing — Copies reference model attachments from thedrawing view in the active drawing.

Copy From Another Drawing — Copies reference model attachments from anydrawing view in the project.

Attach Model — Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.

118

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Reference Models________________ Detach Model — Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletesthe reference model entry in the drawing view table).

Auto Attach/Verify — Automatically attaches reference files for the active drawingview, and displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range of theselected drawing view volume.

Field Descriptions

Disc/Model Name — This field displays a list of models that are attached to theselected drawing view.

Steps

1. Select Reference Models from the Revise Drawing View form.

The system displays the Reference Models form.

2. Select one of the options to change the reference model attachments for the selecteddrawing view.

119


4.4.2.4.1 Copy From Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference modelattachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the DrawingView Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displaysthe Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from theselected drawing view.

Commands

Select Another View — Activates the Drawing View Selection form so that you canselect another view from which to copy reference model attachments.

Field Descriptions

Drawing View Number — Displays the drawing view numbers for the active drawingon the Drawing View Selection form.

Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing ViewSelection form.

Discipline/Model Name — Displays the discipline and model name of the modelsavailable in the selected drawing view on the Copy Drawing View Attachments form.

Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing ViewAttachments form.

Drawing View Number — Displays the selected drawing view number on the CopyDrawing View Attachments form.

120

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Copy From Active Drawing________________

Steps

1. Select the Copy From Active Drawing option from the Reference Models form.

The system displays the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views foractive drawing.


Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, andAccept the drawing view. The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachmentsform with a list of any reference model attachments for the selected drawing view.

3. Select Model

Select the reference model to copy, and Accept the specified model.

Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing ViewAttachment Copy Completed.

4. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing ViewSelection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.

121


4.4.2.4.2 Copy From Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference modelattachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays.After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays whichallows you to define models from a specific drawing model.

After a drawing is selected and accepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After adrawing view is selected and accepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displayswhich allows you to copy models from the selected drawing views.

Field Descriptions


122

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Copy From Another Drawing________________ Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number on the Copy Drawing ViewAttachments form.


Steps

1. Select the Copy From Another Drawing option from the Reference Models form.

The system displays the Drawing Selection form with a Drawing Types display list.

2. Select Drawing Type

Select the type of drawing to use, and select Accept.

The system activates the Drawing Selection form with Drawing Number display list.

3. Select Drawing

Select the drawing to use, and select Accept.

The system activates the Drawing View Selection form with a list of drawing views inthe selected drawing.


Select the drawing view that contains the reference model attachments to be copied, andselect Accept.

The system activates the Copy Drawing View Attachments form with aDiscipline/Model Name display list of all reference model attachments for thespecified drawing view.

123


5. Select Model

Select the reference models to be copied, and select Accept.

Following successful completion, the system displays the message Drawing ViewAttachment Copy Completed.

6. You can select the Select Another View option to reactivate the Drawing ViewSelection form to select another view from which to copy reference model attachments.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Drawing View form.

124

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Attach Model________________

4.4.2.4.3 Attach Model

This option activates a Discipline display list. It is used to attach reference models tospecified drawing views.

Steps

1. Select the Attach Model option from the Reference Models form.

The system displays the Discipline display list.

2. Select Discipline or Exit

Select a discipline, and select Accept.

The system displays the Reference Models display list.

125


3. Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the model files for a specified area, or toSelect Models to specify the individual reference models to be attached.

— THEN —

Select the area to attach to the drawing view, or the area that contains the models toattach.

The system attaches all models in the selected area when the toggle is set to Attach byArea. Go to Step 5.

The system displays a list of models for the drawing view when the toggle is set toSelect Models.

4. Select Model

The system uses the default model data categories defined using theProject Setup command to determine which categories are displayed inthe models selected. If no defaults are set, the system displays allcategories.

Select the model(s) to attach to the drawing view.

5. Select Accept.

The system updates the database, displays a message indicating that the referencemodel is being attached, and returns to the list of areas for another selection.

Select Cancel to exit the form and return to the Revise Drawing form.

126

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Detach Model________________

4.4.2.4.4 Detach Model

This option detaches selected reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.

Steps

1. Select the Detach Model option from the Reference Models form.

The system activates a list of models for the specified drawing view.

2. Select Model

Select the reference model(s) to be detached from the active drawing view.

The system highlights the selected reference model(s).

3. Accept or Select Additional Models

Accept the highlighted reference models as the models to be detached, or select anothermodel.

The system detaches the selected reference model(s) from the drawing view and updatesthe Disc/Model Name display list.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit the form or select another option without detaching the referencemodel.

127


4.4.2.4.5 Auto Attach/Verify

Selecting this option activates the All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle and thePropagated / Sparse Models toggle.

The All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle is used to automatically attach referencefiles to the active drawing view from all disciplines or from pre-defined disciplines. Itdisplays all the models within the project that have elements within the clipping volume of theactive drawing view.

The Propagated / Sparse Models toggle is only applicable for sites using the ModelDraftproduct. This toggle is used to limit the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show onlypropagated or sparse models in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparsemodels cannot be attached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are includedin the same model.

When the toggles are set and the form is confirmed, the system displays the AutomaticAttach / Verify form and highlights the reference models which are already attached. Thisform is used to attach additional models.

128

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Auto Attach/Verify________________

Commands

All Disciplines / Pre-Defined Disciplines — The Pre-Defined Disciplines settingfilters the reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using theProject Setup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in thedrawing view volume selected regardless of the discipline.

Propagated / Sparse Models — Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, thistoggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propagated or sparsemodels in the reference model display list. Propagated and sparse models cannot beattached simultaneously, unless propagated and sparse graphics are included in thesame model.

Disc/Model Name — Displays a list of the currently attached models on the ReferenceModels form.

Disc/Area Number — Displays a list of the available models on the AutomaticAttachment/Verify in either the entire project or that are in the pre-defined disciplines,depending on the toggle setting.

Steps

1. Select the Auto Attach/Verify option from the Reference Models form.

The system activates a Pre-Defined Disciplines and a Propagated Models toggle.

2. Set the Pre-Defined Disciplines toggle to see the filtered or non-filtered list of models,and set the Propagated Models toggle to see the propagated or sparse models, thenselect Accept.

129

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The system activates the Automatic Attachment/Verify form. It also displays themessages Forming Reference File List and then the message Select Model.

3. Select the models from the displayed reference file list. (Models that are alreadyattached will already be highlighted.)

4. Accept or Select Additional Models

Highlight the reference models as the models to be attached and select Accept tocontinue.

The system displays the message Attaching Reference Model and returns to theDrawing View Ref Model Attachments form.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit the form without attaching the reference model.

130

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Delete Options________________

4.5 Delete Options

This option activates the Delete Options form. It is used to delete an existing drawing ordrawing view from the project. When a Delete option is selected, the Drawing Types displaylist will activate.

Commands

Delete Drawing — Deletes a drawing.

Delete Drawing View — Deletes a drawing view.

Steps

1. Select the Delete options from the Drawing Manager form.

The system displays the Delete Options form.

2. Select one of the Delete options.

For each of the Delete options, the system displays the available Drawing Types in thedisplay list.



The system displays the associated delete form for the selected drawing type.

131


4.5.1 Delete Drawing

This option displays the Drawing Number display list. It is used to specify a drawing file tobe deleted from the project.

Steps

1. Select Delete Drawing and the drawing type to be deleted and select Accept.

The system activates the Delete Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.

2. Select Drawing

Select the drawing to be deleted, and select Accept.

The system deletes the drawing in the database and its associated design file andupdates the Delete Drawing form to reflect the current list of drawings for the project.

Delete additional drawings by selecting another drawing.

3. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.

132

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Delete Drawing View________________

4.5.2 Delete Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Number display list.

When a drawing is selected and confirmed, the Delete Drawing View form is activated. It isused to delete a drawing view or composite drawing view.

Steps

1. Select Delete Drawing View and select the drawing type of the drawing view to bedeleted and select Accept.

The system activates the Select Drawing form with a Drawing Number display list.

2. Select Drawing

133

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Select the drawing containing the drawing view(s) to be deleted, and select Accept.

The system activates the Delete Drawing View form with a Drawing View display list.


Select the view to be deleted, and select Accept.

The system deletes the drawing view from the database and updates the DeleteDrawing View form to reflect the current drawing view data.

You can delete additional drawing views by selecting another drawing view number.

4. Select Cancel to return to the Delete Options form.

134

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report - Drawing Management Data________________

4.6 Report - Drawing Management Data

This option produces a Drawing Management Data Report on all the drawings associated witha project. It creates a report named drawing_report in the project directory.

Steps

1. Select Report - Drawing Management Data from the Drawing Manager form.

Creating Drawing Management Data Report

The system creates the report in the project directory.

Drawing Management Report has been Created

Sample Report

Drawing Management Data Report

Date : 18-Sep-97Time : 12:24:06

Project Number : stdeng_o43Project Name : Standard EnglishJob Number : 1234Company Name : Created on 6.2Plant Name : Intergraph Corporation


Drawing Type: Foundation Location Drawings ADrawing : 00FD0102 Area 40 Fondation Location Plan 3/8"=1’ D00fd0102.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

135

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Drawing : 40FL0101 Area 40 Foundation Locations 3/8"=1’ D40fl0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\


Drawing Type: Piling Drawings ADrawing : bctest dssds 3/8"=1’ Dbctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\


Drawing Type: Plot Plans A

Drawing : 311 test drawing #311 1/4"=1’ D311.dgn plot1 c:\plot\

Drawing : 311 variation test drawing #311A 1/4"=1’ D311variat.dgn plot2 c:\plot\


Drawing Type: Equipment Arrangement Drawings A

Drawing : drwX drawing 311 from Omaha, NE 3/8"=1’ Cdrwx.dgn drwmgt c:\draw\user\

Drawing:train.1 Training 1: RLH 3/16"=1’ Btrain.1.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\

Drawing : train.2 Training 2: RLH 3/16"=1’ Btrain.2.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\

Drawing : train.3 Training 3: RLH 3/16"=1’ Btrain.3.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\

Drawing : train.X Train 4 3/16"=1’ Btrain.x.dgn rlh123 c:\rlhcert\dwg\


Drawing Type: Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections & Details A

Drawing : 40PPSD001 Area 40 Title Block Test 3/8"=1’ D40ppsd001.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : 40pd0101 Area 40 Piping Plan 3/8"=1’ D40pd0101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : 40ppsd101 Title Block Test 3/8"=1’ D40ppsd101.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : bcdraw test drawings 3/8"=1’ Ebcdraw.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : lctest test for symbology 1/4"=1’ Alctest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : test2 test dwg 1/4"=1’ Btest.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

136

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report - Drawing Management Data________________ Drawing : vhl2_0 testing of VHL version 2.0 3/8"=1’ Dvhl2_0.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

Drawing : wwdraw1 Documentation Drawing 3/8"=1’ Bwwdraw1.dgn cs108g c:\u4\oes43\draw\

137


4.7 Report Models Form

This command activates the Report Models form. This form is used to generate reports fromthe models within the drawing with the report definition data. This functionality is also usedto report the custom defined drawing management data from attributes in the drawingdatabase. The Drawing Report Manager stores the report record and location records foreach discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numberedrecords are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.

Each report is based on only one drawing, with only one view in that drawing.Multiple drawings can be reported on in batch mode by creating multiplediscrimination data sets.

138

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Models Form________________

Options

Report Format — Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create,revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For moreinformation, see Report Format Form, page 142.

Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form, which youcan use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as wellas the file itself. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form, page 148.

Report — Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, andapprove report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form, page174.

Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form,which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the defaultnodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used forsetup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form, page 190.

139


4.7.1 Using the Report Commands

Understanding Report Files and Records

The Drawing Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and databaserecords that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all ofthe files and records in the reporting process.

Format File and Record

The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outsideof the Drawing Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears inthe report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report.Without the format file(s), Drawing Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set ofbasic format files is delivered for each type of reporting.

Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file sothat it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the ProjectControl Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, theformat record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data thatis used for report processing but is not an actual file. A format file can be created to generatedrawing management data and controlled by the user. A sample drawing management formatfile is delivered at PDPROJEC\sample\drw_mgt.fmt.

Discrimination Data File and Record

The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It isan ASCII file that is created interactively using the Drawing Report Manager.

The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name andlocate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for eachdiscrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same waythat the format record is used to access a format file.

The discrimination data form in Drawing Manager, by default, sets one drawing perdiscrimination data file. To run a report on drawing management data on all drawings, createthe discrimination data file in Report Manager. The discrimination data file will allow onlypiping and eqp models to be attached. Select any piping model to create the discriminationdata file, and access this discrimination data file when creating the report.

140

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Using the Report Commands________________

Report Output and Record

The Drawing Report Manager creates a report using the specified format, discrimination,and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node.

The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate areport, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that isused for report processing but is not an actual file.)

Group Workflow

There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use theReport Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the reportdefinition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and pathon each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default,simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification.

The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination datarecord, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report DiscriminationData options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file,and their corresponding records have been established.

Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

141


4.8 Report Format Form

When you choose the Report Format option from the Report Manager form, the ReportFormat form is displayed.

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the formatfile in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy arecord and its corresponding ASCII format files.

The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will bedisplayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file’slocation has been entered into the project control database.

Options

Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add anew record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, seeFormat Creation/Revision Form, page 144.

Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of anexisting format file from the project control database along with the correspondingASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form, page144.

Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of anexisting format file in the project control database. For more information, see FormatCreation/Revision Form, page 144.

142

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Format Form________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format filefrom the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reportingcannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form, page 146.

143


4.8.1 Format Creation/Revision Form

When you choose Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the FormatCreation/Revision form is displayed.

This form creates or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines thelocation of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report.Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.

Field Descriptions

Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in theproject control database used to identify the record of the format file.

Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.

File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference.

Path — The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.

Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This fieldretains the active setting.

144

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Format Creation/Revision Form________________

Before Using this Form

You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with thePD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file forMTO reporting is named piping_#.fmt.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.

A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record,go to Step 3.

2. Select Report Format

From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.

Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information.

3. Specify Report Format Data

Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press return in eachfield. Then click Accept.

The project control database is updated.

145


4.8.2 Format Deletion Form

When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally deletethe associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records,discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their databaserecords.

Fields and Options

Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-characterdescription of a report record in the project control database.

Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted.When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file.When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence


From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted.

146

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Format Deletion Form________________

2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.

The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

147


4.9 Discrimination Data Form

When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, theDiscrimination Data form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specifieddirectory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, ordeleted as needed.

A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in areport. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project controldatabase record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to beassociated with a specific report.

Options

Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a newdiscrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created.

Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existingdata file. The associated project control database record is also copied.

Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifiesdiscrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discriminationdata file, the location of the discrmination file, and the associated record in the projectcontrol database.

148

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Discrimination Data Form________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as wellas its associated record in the project control database. For more information, seeDiscrimination Data Deletion Form, page 163.

149


4.9.1 Discrimination Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination DataCreation form is displayed.

This form creates a discrimination data file in a specified directory. It also creates acorresponding record in the project control database. In addition, you can use this form tospecify segment and component search criteria.

If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify searchcriteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified usingthe Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options

Drawing Number — The drawing number of the active drawing.

Number — The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of thediscrimination data record in the project control database.

Description — The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record inthe project control database.

File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.

File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains theactive settings.

150

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Discrimination Data Creation Form________________ File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.

Select Drawing View — Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing viewbased on the active drawing.

Segment Search Criteria — Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines thesegment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria -Piping Segment Form, page 154.

Component Search Criteria — Displays the Component Search Criteria form,which defines the component search criteria for the report. For more information, seeSearch Criteria - Component Form, page 158.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Create

The Discrimination Data Creation form is displayed.

2. Specify Discrimination Data

In the fields provided, key in the number, description, and file specification, path, andnode.

3. Select additional options as needed to define the report discrimination data. Then clickAccept.

After including any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms whilespecifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even thoughyou may have accepted many of the specifications, however, thediscrimination data file is not actually created until you click Accept on theReport Discrimination Data form.

151


4.9.2 Discrimination Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the DiscriminationData Revision form is displayed.

This form revises an existing discrimination data file. It also copies an existing discriminationdata file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. Thecorresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.In addition, options are provided for you to modify segment and component search criteriadata.

If you use this form to specify search criteria data and you specify searchcriteria data using the Report Search Criteria option, the data specified usingthe Report Search Criteria option takes precedence.

Fields and Options

Drawing Number — The drawing number of the active drawing.

Number — The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of thediscrimination data record in the project control database.

Description — The description, up to 40 characters, of the discrimination data record inthe project control database.

File Specification — The file name of the discrimination data record to be created.

File Path — The disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains theactive settings.

File Node — The nodename of the system on which the discrimination data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.

152

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Discrimination Data Revision Form________________ Select Drawing View — Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing viewbased on the active drawing.



Delete Views — Displays a form which allows you to select a drawing view based onthe active drawing.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Discrimination Data form, select Copy or Revise.

The Discrimination Data Revision form is displayed.




After updating any models or search criteria for the discrimination data file,be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms whilespecifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even thoughyou may have accepted many of the specifications, however, thediscrimination data file is not actually updated until you click Accept on theReport Discrimination Data form.

153


4.9.2.1 Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form

When you choose Segment Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creation formor from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Piping Segmentform is displayed.

This form specifies which segment attributes are to be reported on. The most commonlyreported attributes are available as form options, but you are not restricted to those options.To display all available attributes, click Other.

154

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form________________

When you select an attribute, applicable operator options are displayed along the bottom ofthe form.

The combination of these operators with either attribute values or (where applicable) code listvalues enables you to fully specify an attribute restriction (for example, fluid code = AC).You can combine these specifications as needed using the And and Or options, which aredisplayed in place of the operator options after you have defined a segment attributerestriction.

When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form isdisplayed. This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute.Simply select a code from the list and click Accept to continue with thespecification.

When you are using this form to copy and/or revise an existing discrimination data file,additional options are provided for you to insert, remove, or clear search criteriaspecifications.

155


Fields and Options

Piping Segment — Displays the restricted segment attributes once they have beendefined.

Unit Number — Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit number attribute.Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.

Fluid Code — Restricts the reported segments by means of the fluid code attribute.Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Unit Code — Restricts the reported segments by means of the unit code attribute.Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.

Line Sequence Number — Restricts the reported segments by means of the linesequence number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to completethe specification.

Nominal Piping Diameter — Restricts the reported segments by means of the nominalpiping diameter attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to completethe specification.

Piping Materials Class — Restricts the reported segments by means of the pipingmaterials class attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to completethe specification.

Line ID — Restricts the reported segments by means of the line ID attribute. Select anoperator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.

Insulation Purpose — Restricts the reported segments by means of the insulationpurpose attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Heat Tracing Requirement — Restricts the reported segments by means of the heattracing requirement attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete thespecification.

Train Number — Restricts the reported segments by means of the train numberattribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete the specification.

Construction Status — Restricts the reported segments by means of the constructionstatus attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Approval Status — Restricts the reported segments by means of the approval statusattribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Other — Displays a list of all available attributes.

Brief List — Updates the form to display the attribute options.

156

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria - Piping Segment Form________________ Insert Search Definition — Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria tothe specification.

Remove Search Definition — Removes a selected line from the defined search criteria.To remove a line, click Remove Search Definition, select the line to be removed, andclick Accept.

Clear Search Criteria — Removes the complete search criteria specification. Selectthis option and click Accept to remove the defined set of search criteria.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Segment Search Criteria.

The Search Criteria - Piping Segment form is displayed.

2. Select Attribute

Select an attribute to be restricted.

The available operator options are displayed.

3. Select Operator

Select an operator from the displayed options.

4. For code-listed attributes, select a value from the displayed list and click Accept. Forall other attributes, type an attribute value in the available field.

5. Use the And and Or options to specify additional restrictions as needed. Then clickAccept.

157


4.9.2.2 Search Criteria - Component Form

When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creationform or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Componentform is displayed.

This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is nosearch criteria (that is, no restrictions — all component attributes are reported). The mostcommonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are notrestricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.

158

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria - Component Form________________

Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code andFabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Otheroption is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for eachcategory, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component,Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.



When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list ofassociated attributes is displayed.

159


When you select a code-listed attribute, theReview Standard Notes form is displayed. This form provides a list of validcodes for the specified attribute. Simply select a code from the list and clickAccept to continue with the specification.


The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, InstrumentComponent, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayedas a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, selectthe appropriate button.

Fields and Options

Component — Displays the restricted component attributes once they have beendefined.

Commodity Name — Restricts the reported components by means of the commodityname attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete thespecification.

Commodity Code — Restricts the reported components by means of the commoditycode attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Fabrication Category — Restricts the reported components by means of thefrabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete thespecification.

Component Group Number — Restricts the reported components by means of thecomponent group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value tocomplete the specification.

Tag/Component Number — Restricts the reported components by means of thetag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value tocomplete the specification.

160

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria - Component Form________________ Other — Displays the entity options.

Piping Component — Restricts the reported components by means of any of theattributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Instrument Component — Restricts the reported components by means of any of theattributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list,select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or selecta code list value to complete the specification.

Piping/Tubing — Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributesthat are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Pipe Support — Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributesthat are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Clear ALL Component Search Criteria — Deletes the restricted componentattributes once they have been defined.

Insert Search Definition — Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria tothe specification.



Operating Sequence

1. Select Component Search Criteria.

The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.

2. Select Attribute



3. Select Operator

161

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Select an operator from the displayed options.



162

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Discrimination Data Deletion Form________________

4.9.3 Discrimination Data Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



163




164

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria Data Form________________

4.10 Search Criteria Data Form

When you select Report Search Criteria from the Report Manager form, the SearchCriteria Data form is displayed.

Use this form to create, copy, revise, or delete report search criteria. Search criteria datadetermines and reduces the amount of data reported by restricting the reporting of certainattributes. Rather than report all data in a model, search criteria specifications narrow thereport to return only data that matches certain criteria.

You can specify search criteria as you create the discrimination data file; the options on theSearch Criteria Data form create the same data as a separate step. If you specify searchcriteria data as you create the discrimination data file and by means of the Report SearchCriteria form, the specifications defined using the Report Search Criteria take precedencewhen the report is generated.

Options

Create — Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new recordof a report search criteria file in the project control database. For more information, seeSearch Criteria Data Creation Form, page 167.

Copy — Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies therecord of an existing report search criteria file from the project control database andcopies the corresponding data file. For more information, see Search Criteria DataRevision Form, page 170.

165

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies anexisting record of a report search criteria file in the project control database. For moreinformation, see Search Criteria Data Revision Form, page 170.

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report search criteriadata file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For moreinformation, see Search Criteria Deletion Form, page 172.

166

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria Data Creation Form________________

4.10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria DataCreation form is displayed.

This form creates a report search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates acorresponding record in the project control database.

If you specify search criteria using both this form and the search criteriaoptions when you create the discrimination data, the search criteria specifiedon this form (Search Criteria Data Creation) takes precedence.

Fields and Options

Number — The unique number, up to 24 characters, that is the short name of thesearch criteria data file record in the project control database.

Description — The description, up to 40 characters, of the search criteria data filerecord in the project control database.

File Specification — The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data fileto be created.

File Path — The disk location of the search criteria data file. This field retains theactive settings.

167

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ File Node — The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.



Revise AND/OR Relation — Displays a list of And/Or relationships.

Use this list to change the And/Or relationships between piping segment search criteria(table 12, piping segment data) and the search criteria for the component data in table34, piping component data; table 50, piping/tubing data; table 67, instrumentcomponent data; and table 80, pipe support data.

Each category of component search criteria data is related to the piping segment searchcriteria by a logical AND or a logical OR. By default, the logical relationship betweenthe piping segment search criteria and the four categories of component search criteriais AND. This means that only components that meet the criteria defined for both sets ofcriteria are reported.

Setting this relationship to OR increases the amount of data reported in that allcomponents that match either set of criteria are reported.

This is not an exclusive OR. With the OR setting, components thatmatch both (or either) sets of criteria are reported.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create

The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.




168

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er


After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file,be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms whilespecifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even thoughyou may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the searchcriteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the SearchCriteria Data Creation form.

169


4.10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search CriteriaData File Revision form is displayed.

This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteriadata file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. Thecorresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.

Fields and Options



File Specification — The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to becreated.




Define Volume — Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies thecoordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see TheDefine Volume Form.

170

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria Data Revision Form________________ Revise AND/OR Relation — Displays a list of And/Or relationships.





Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Search Criteria form, select Copy or Revise.

The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available datafiles.

2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.



4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then clickAccept.

171


4.10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



172

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Search Criteria Deletion Form________________



173


4.11 Report Form

When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holdsspecifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description,and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate areport.

The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is includedin the format file.

At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the followinginformation:

Report Output — The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, andreport node, path, and file name.

Format — The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.

Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number, description, and filelocation (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data isalso included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), searchcriteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

Search Criteria — The report search criteria number, description, and file location(node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list ofmodel numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable),and sorting sequence.

174

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Form________________

Options

Create — Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record andgenerates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form, page 176.

Revise — Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from anexisting or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form, page179.

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and thecorresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form, page 182.

Approve — Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report.For more information, see Report Approval Form, page 184.

Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiplereports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form, page188.

175


4.11.1 Report Creation Form

When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records arestored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly as needed.

Fields and Options

Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of thereport file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the reportfile short name.

Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not thetitle in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the reportis contained in the format file.

Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).

Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on theReport Management Dataform. For more information, see Report ManagementDefaults Form, page 190.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if youhave specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information,see Report Management Defaults Form, page 190.

176

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Creation Form________________ Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.

Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discriminationdata files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.

Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteriafiles is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.

Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear aspecification, click Accept without selecting a file.

If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has searchcriteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in thisfield, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria fieldtakes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discriminationdata.

Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.

Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. This is aread-only field; you cannot edit it.

Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field isoptional.

Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.This field is optional.

Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and thendeletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available printqueues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.

Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves thereport output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues isdisplayed. Click on a queue to select it.

Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report.

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will beprocessed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields displayfor you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

177


Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Create.

The Report Creation form is displayed.

2. Specify Report Data

Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file,discrimination data file, and search criteria data file.

3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to beprinted.

4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and timethat the report is to be submitted.

5. Click Accept to save the report file.

178

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Report Form________________

4.11.2 Revise Report Form

When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project controldatabase. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record withoutgenerating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report outputfile without updating the report record.

Fields and Options


Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not thetitle in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the reportis contained in the format file.

Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).

Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains theactive settings.

Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will belocated. This field retains the active settings.

Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the activereport. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Selectthe appropriate format file, and click Accept.

Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discriminationdata files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.

179

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used togenerate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteriafiles is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept.

Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear aspecification, click Accept without selecting a file.

If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has searchcriteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in thisfield, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria fieldtakes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discriminationdata.

Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.

Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. This is aread-only field; you cannot edit it.

Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field isoptional.

Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision.This field is optional.




Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the reportwill be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additionalfields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report dataonly (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (ReviseReport and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the reportoutput file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and clickAccept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report andData without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the reportfile and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to ReviseData Only, and click Accept.

If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title,this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and thereport output file is generated.

180

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Revise Report Form________________

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Revise.

The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files.

2. Select Report

From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.

The fields update to display the selected report file specifications.

3. Revise Report Information

Update the report record information as needed.


5. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later(Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and timethat the report is to be submitted.

6. Click Accept to save the report file.

181


4.11.3 Report Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



182

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Deletion Form________________



183


4.11.4 Report Approval Form

You can now approve drawings directly on the Revise Drawing form. However, the approvalprocess described below can still be used.

When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attributeis set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way foryou to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a reportis revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.

Options

Number — The 24-character unique name (as called short name) of the report record.

Description — The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Approve.

The Report Approval form is displayed.

2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.

The Approval form is displayed.

184

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Approval Form________________ For more information, see Approval/Revision Interface Form, page 186.

185


4.11.4.1 Approval/Revision Interface Form

The Approval form is displayed as part of the workflow for approving reports. First youspecify the report to be approved on the Report Approval form. When you click Accept, theApproval/Revision Interface form is displayed.

The first time a report is approved, only the Approved By field is active. All other fields arepurely informational. The data displayed in these fields is read from the Revise Report form.

Fields and Options


Report Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.

Approved By — The initials (up to five characters) of the person who approved thereport.

Revision Number – The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Thisfield is read-only; you cannot edit it.

Revised By — The initials (up to five characters) of the person who last revised thereport. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.

186

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Approval/Revision Interface Form________________ Checked By — The initials (up to five characters) of the person who ran the report withthe revised information. This field is read-only; you cannot edit it.

Revision Description — Displays a short description of the revision. This field isread-only; you cannot edit it.

Operating Sequence

1. On the Report Approval form, click Accept.

The Approval/Revision Interface form is displayed.

2. Specify Approval/Revision Data

Key in user initials in the Approved By field. Then click Accept.

187


4.11.5 Report Multiple Submit Form

When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form isdisplayed.

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.

Fields and Options

Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the reportfile in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file shortname.

Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.




Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the reportwill be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additionalfields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

188

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Multiple Submit Form________________

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.

The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

2. Select Reports for Submission

From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighed reports are selected;select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report.


4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) orlater (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the dateand time that the report is to be submitted.

5. Click Accept to submit the reports.

189


4.12 Report Management Defaults Form

When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the ReportManagement Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of thereport definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.

Fields

Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files.

It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system’stemporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory.

Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report outputfiles are located.

Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files.

Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on whichformat files are located.

Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discriminationdata files.

190

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Report Management Defaults Form________________ Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which discrimination data files are located.

Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report searchcriteria data files.

Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the systemon which report search criteria data files are located.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.

The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

2. Accept or Exit

In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report outputfiles, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then clickAccept.

191


4.13 Approve Drawing

You can now use the Approval fields on the Revise Drawing form to approvea drawing instead of using the Approve Drawing form. However, theApprove Drawing form is still functional.

This option activates the Approve Drawing form. It is used to input approval details fordrawings and drawing revisions. First, the system displays the Drawing Types display list, asshown on the left. When a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the list of drawings of thistype will be displayed, as shown on the right.

When a specific drawing is selected and confirmed for approval, the Drawing Approval formis activated.

This form displays the approval and revision fields which are used to store approvalinformation about drawings and revisions.

The Approval Status is automatically not approved when the drawing isrevised and the approval details are not updated.

192

4.Draw

ing

M

anag

er

Approve Drawing________________

The first time a drawing is approved only the Approval Initials field isdisplayed. Once a drawing has been approved, all of the other revision fieldswill be displayed.

Commands

Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block — Controls the automatic generation oftitle block information for the drawing being aproved. The default setting for thistoggle is Load Title Block. The toggle is only active if the ASCII file that defines thetext nodes in the title block resides in the project directory. For more information, referto Automatic Title Block Generation, page 42.

Field Descriptions

Approved By — Key in the initials of the person who approved the drawing orrevision.

Revision Number — Displays the revision number as specified in the Create Drawingor Revise Drawing forms.

Last Revision — Displays the last revision number.

Revised By — Displays the initials of the person who last revised the drawing.

Checked By — Displays the initials of the person who checked the revisions performedon the drawing.

Revision Description — Displays the short description of the changes to the drawingas specified in the Create Drawing or Revise Drawing forms.

Steps

1. Select the Approve Drawing option from the Drawing Manager form.

The system activates a Drawing Types display list.


Select a drawing type, and select Accept.

The system displays a list of the existing drawings in the selected type.

3. Select Drawing

Select the drawing to be approved, and select Accept.

The system activates the Approval/Revision Interface form.

193


4. Key in the approval information for the report.

5. Accept the approval information.

The system processes the information and automatically stores the date and time whenthe drawing was approved.

Drawing Approval Status Updated

The system returns to the list of drawing views so that you can select another drawingfor approval.

6. Select Cancel to exit the form.

194

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Graphics Environment________________

5. Graphics Environment

This chapter provides information on all of the pull-down menus in the graphics environmentwith the exception of the Drawing pull-down menu options.

Drawing — This pull-down provides access to the Composition and Annotationoptions. Each of these options are described in their own chapter. For moreinformation about Composition, refer to Composing Drawings, page 227; Annotationis discussed in Annotating Drawings, page 293.

View — This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands resultin modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate theview of the model but do not manipulate the actual model.

File — This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such ascompressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plotdrawings or select another drawing.

Element — This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the ElementInformation settings box.

Settings — This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colorsused during a graphics session.

User — This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your systemsuch as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how variousitems on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.

195


5.1 Drawing

These commands allow you to compose and annotate drawings.

Commands

Composition — Activates the palette of Composition commands. Refer toComposing Drawings, page 227 for the discussion of these commands.

Annotation — Activates the palette of Annotation commands. Refer to AnnotatingDrawings, page 293 for the discussion of these commands.

196

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

View________________

5.2 View

These commands provide view manipulations. All of these commands result inmodifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate theview of the model but do not manipulate the actual model. Each pull-downcommand is detailed in its own section of this chapter.

Command Groups

Viewing — Activates a palette of viewing options.

Viewing, More — Activates another palette of viewing options.

Viewing Direction — Activates a palette of viewing direction options thatallow for rotation of the view.

View Depth — Activates a palette of view depth options that change thedepth of the view.

Open/Close — Lets you open or close a view. The items in the sub-menu areview numbers. The view numbers that are marked are open.

Bottom-to-Top — Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view isfully obscured before this item is chosen.

Cascade — Stacks views in numerical order iwth the lowest numbered viewentirely visible and the title bar of each remaining view visible.

Tile — Tiles open graphics views.

Swap — Swaps the screen image between two logical screens. When Swap ischosen, the physical screens are updated with the contents of the previouslyhidden logical screen.

This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if itdoes not support two virtual screens.

Update — Updates a view, all of the views, the right or left view or the griddisplayed on a view.

Previous — Lets you view the previous viewing operation.

Next — Lets you view the next viewing operation. This is only valid afterPrevious.

197

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Copy — Copies the content of one view into another specified view.

Camera — Turns on the camera and defines the camera position and target.

— On turns the camera on.

— Off turns the camera off.

— Set Up turns on and sets up the camera.

— Move Camera moves the camera (like focusing the camera at an objectand moving around to obtain different views of it).

— Move Target moves the target (like standing in one position and pointingthe camera at different objects).

— Lens opens the Camera Lens setting box, which is used to set the anglesand focal lenths of view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if appliedwith the Apply button.

Render — Renders views in one of the following ways: wiremesh, hiddenline, filled hidden line, constant, smooth, phong, phong stereo, or phongantialias. Also, FlyThrough activates the FlyThrough Producer setting box,which is used to create simple animations, called sequences, for visualizing 3Dmodels.

198

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

View________________ Levels — Defines which levels are displayed in a view. Changes take effectonly if applied with the Apply button.

Rotation — Opens the change view rotation box, which is used to controlview rotation. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.

199


5.2.1 View Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands that are availablefrom the View palette.

Commands

Window Center — Defines a new center point for a window view.

Window Area — Defines a window viewing area by two data points.

Viewing Options — Sets the screen display and view control options. See Viewing Options, page201 for more information.

Zoom In — Changes the magnification to focus on a smaller display area.

Zoom Out — Changes the magnification to focus on a larger display area.

Fit — Displays all elements in a selected view.

Drawing Categories — Review or modify the displayed category data (segregation parameters)associated with a screen view. See the Drawing Categories, page 203 section for moreinformation.

Set Reference Categories to Predefined — Overrides user-specified reference category selectionfor that drawing view, and uses system default reference categories for that drawing view instead.

200

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Viewing Options________________

Viewing Options

This command activates the Viewing Options form used to update the screen display, setforms to display on the right or left screen, and set the view control options.

Commands

Update Both — Select to update both the left (back) and right (front) display screens.

Update View — Select and place a data point in the window view to be updated.

Update Left — Select to update the left screen only.

Update Right — Select to update the right screen only.

Copy View — Copies a selected view display from one window to another.

Swap View — Changes a selected view from either the right or left screen display.

View On — Activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1 -4) on the right screen and the window views (5 - 8) on the left screen.

Select the window view to be turned on by placing a data point on the displayedwindow view option(s).

View Off — Select and place a data point in the window view(s) to turn specifiedview(s) off.

201

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Level Symbology On — Enables the display of reference models with the activereference model symbology.

Level Symbology Off — Disables the display of reference models with the activereference model symbology.

Reload Reference Symbology — Reloads the display of reference models with theactive reference model symbology.

Form Right Screen/Form Left Screen — Sets forms to be automatically displayed onthe right (front) screen or the left (back) screen.


Select Source View Place a data point to identify the drawing view as thesource to be copied.

Select Destination View(s) Place a data point to identify the window view(s) toreceive the copied drawing view.

202

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Drawing Categories________________

5.2.1.1 Drawing Categories

This command activates the Drawing Categories form. This form is used to review, revise,add, and remove drawing categories for a selected view.

Options

Review/Revise — Reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels)displayed in a selected view.

Add — Adds drawing categories (display levels) to a selected view.

Remove — Removes drawing categories (display levels) from a selected view.

203


5.2.1.1.1 Review/Revise Category

This option reviews and revises the drawing categories (display levels) displayed in a selectedview. This option is activated by default.


Select View Select the view for which you wish to revise/reviewcategories.

Accept or Select Category Select the categories to be turned off in the selectedview. Categories set ON for display will be highlighted,and those set to OFF for display will not be highlighted.Accept the selected (highlighted) categories.

— OR —

Select Cancel.

204

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Add Category________________

5.2.1.1.2 Add Category

This option activates the Add Drawing Categories form. It is used to add drawing categoriesfor display in a selected view. You can specify that all graphics be turned on for display, orthat only specific categories be turned on.

Commands

All Drawing Graphics — Add all of the drawing graphic categories in the selectedview.

Hidden Line Graphics — Add only hidden line categories for display.


Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the drawing view.

— OR —

Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn on allof the drawing graphic categories in the selected view.

— OR —

Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to add onlyhidden line categories for display.

Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display theadded categories.

Select View or Revise CategoriesSelect another view, or select Restart and select othercategories to be added.

205


5.2.1.1.3 Remove Category

This option removes the drawing categories that are turned on in a selected view. Thecategories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.

Commands

All Drawing Graphics — Turns off all of the drawing graphic categories in theselected view.

Hidden Line Graphics — Removes only hidden line categories for display.


Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the drawing view.

— OR —

Select the All Drawing Graphics option to turn off allof the drawing graphic categories in a selected view.

— OR —

Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to removeonly hidden line categories from the display.

Select View Place a data point to identify the view for categoryremoval.

Select View or Revise CategoriesSelect another view, or select Restart and select morecategories to be removed.

206

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

View, More Commands________________

5.2.2 View, More Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands made available byusing the View, More command.

Commands

Update Left — Updates the screen display for the left virtual screen.

Update Right — Updates the screen display for the right virtual screen.

Update All — Updates the screen display for both left and right virtual screens.

Update View — Updates the screen display for the selected window view.

Align View — Aligns two views so that they display the same volume.

Copy View — Copies one view to another view.

View On — Turns on selected screen views.

View Off — Turns off selected screen views.

View Toggle — Turns On or Off the display of any of the eight screen views.

Move Up — Moves you (pans) up in the selected view.

Move Down — Moves you (pans) down in the selected view.

Move Left — Moves you (pans) left in the selected view.

Move Right — Moves you (pans) right in the selected view.

Level Symbology On — Displays reference models with the active reference model symbology.

Level Symbology Off — Disables the display of reference models with the active reference modelsymbology.

207


Weight Display Toggle — Toggles the line weight in the selected view to 0 or to the weight ofthe graphic symbology of the graphics within the view.

Grid On/Off — Toggles the grid on and off in the selected view.

208

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Viewing Direction________________

5.2.3 Viewing Direction

These commands are the basic view modification commands made available by selectingViewing Direction.

Commands

Rotate View - Element — Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.

Rotate View - Absolute — Rotates a view to a specific orientation.

Rotate View - Relative — Rotates a view counterclockwise about its center.

Rotate about Z Axis — Rotates view about the Z axis.

Rotate about X Axis — Rotates view about the X axis.

Rotate about Y Axis — Rotates view about the Y axis.

Rotate View by 3 Points — Rotates a view as specified by data points.

Match Planar Element — Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.

Dialog View Rotate — Activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.

209


5.2.4 View Depth

These commands are the basic view modification commands.

Commands

Set Active Depth — Sets the active depth; key in the working unit value (relative to the currentactive depth) of displacement.

Set Display Depth — Specifies the front and back of a range in a 3D view to be displayed alongthe Z axis.

Set Active Depth - Absolute — Sets the active depth along the Z axis for a specified view.

Set Display Depth - Absolute — Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and backvalues which are the distances along the view Z axis from the global origin to the front and backplanes of the desired view cube.

Set Active Depth - Relative — Sets the display depth for the active view, where depth is thedistance, in working units, to move the active depth along the Z axis.

Set Display Depth - Relative — Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the front and backvalues which are the relative distance along the view Z axis from the front and back planes of theexisting view cube to the front and back planes of the desired view cube.

Show Active Depth — Displays the active depth for a specified view.

Show Display Depth — Shows the display depth for a specified view.

210

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

File________________

5.3 File

These commands allow you to plot drawings, display the active options, select anotherdrawing or do a file design.

Commands

Plot — Allows you to select I/Plot parameters files, scale and rotation factors,active or default categories, the submission time, and the queue used to plot thedrawing.

File Design — Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.

Exit — Exits the design file.

Active Options — Defines the parameters that determine the drawing annotationmodes for precision key-ins, activates the Plant Coordinate System or DesignVolume Coordinate System, and sets connect point mode.

Select Another Drawing — Exits the active drawing and display a differentactive drawing design file without exiting the drawing environment.

211


5.3.1 Plot

The Plot command activates the Plot Drawing form that allows you to select I/Plotparameters files, scale and rotation factors, active or default categories, the submission time,and the queue used to plot the drawing.

Commands

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Set toggle to submit the plotimmediately or to delay submission for a more convenient time.

Field Descriptions

I/Plot Parameter Files — Displays the available I/Plot parameter files.

Queues — Displays the available queues.


Accept to Submit, or Select OptionSelect an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with yourdrawing. If no parameters file is selected, the drawingwill be processed without one.

Select a queue. If no queue is selected, the system willuse the Default queue.

212

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Plot________________ Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission isDelayed to specify the time to submit the plotteddrawing.

Select Accept when all selections have been made.

This command’s Default Pre-defined Drawing Categories toggle is different fromthe default setting of the Plot Drawing command in Plot Manager.

213


5.3.2 File Design

The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the currentdesign session. This command saves:

MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes

PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location ofthe Piping Designer base form.

214

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Exit________________

5.3.3 Exit

The Exit command is used to exit graphics and save all changes to the design file. Exiting adesign file does NOT save the active parameters set in the file. To save the active parameters,you must use the File Design command.

215


5.3.4 Active Options

This command activates the Active Options form. It is used to control how the active drawingdesign graphics look when displayed on the screen. It specifies or changes the defaults for theCoordinate Label and Name Label orientation, determines connect points, and specifies theplacement location of combination labels.

Modes

Drawing — Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances formiscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands in terms of thecoordinate system with respect to the drawing’s scale.

For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins areinterpreted in terms of the drawing scale.

— PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in terms of the selectedcoordinate system and the drawing scale.

This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command.

— PDX delta easting distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and thedrawing scale.


— PDY delta northing distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and thedrawing scale.


— PDZ delta elevation distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and thedrawing scale.

216

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Active Options________________ This key-in results in a point being defined to the active command.

— PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in term’s of the selectedcoordinate system and the drawing scale.


— PDK a distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the drawing scale(for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", e.g.Copy Parallel by Distance).

This key-in results in a distance key-in being defined to the active command.

The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-insare used with this option.

Detail — Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distances to definemiscellaneous drawing annotation with Microstation commands for user-created detailsin terms of the coordinate system with respect to the user-defined active scale. Forinstance, you may place a line where the end points have been specified in terms of theselected coordinate system relative to a specific drawing.

For drawing annotation in the Detail mode, the following distance key-ins areinterpreted in terms of the selected scale.

— PDX delta X distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the selectedscale.


— PDY delta Y distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the selectedscale.


— PDZ delta Z distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the selectedscale.


— PDL delta X, Y, and Z distances in term’s of the selected coordinate system and theselected scale.


— PDK an absolute distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and theselected scale (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=", such as Copy Parallel by Distance).


217

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Drawing View — Provides PDS-specific key-ins of absolute coordinates and distancesto define miscellaneous drawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system withrespect to the selected drawing view’s scale and orientation within the drawing.

For drawing annotation in the Drawing View mode, the following distance key-ins areinterpreted in terms of the selected drawing view’s scale and orientation within thedrawing.

— PXY absolute easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in term’s of the selectedcoordinate system and the active drawing view.


— PDX delta easting distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and theactive drawing view.


— PDY delta northing distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the"active drawing view"


— PDZ delta elevation distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and theactive drawing view.


— PDL delta easting, northing, and elevation coordinates in term’s of the selectedcoordinate system and the active drawing view.


— PDK a distance in term’s of the selected coordinate system and the active drawingview (for use with the Microstation commands that require a distance key-in, "D=",e.g. Copy Parallel by Distance).


The system displays an error message when absolute coordinate key-insare used with this option.

Commands

Plant Coordinate System / Design Volume Coordinate System — If the coordinatetoggle is set to Plant Coordinate System, the Plant Coordinate System is used todefine the key-ins. If coordinate toggle is set to Design Volume Coordinate System,the coordinate system of the active design volume is used to define the key-ins.

218

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Active Options________________ All Connect Points/Nearest Connect Point — If the toggle is set to All ConnectPoints, the system locates the connect points by priority (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press<R> to move to the successive connect points. Then press <D> to accept the location.If the toggle is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connect pointclosest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.

Steps

1. Select the Active Options command from the bar menu.

The system displays the Active Options form with the Drawing mode activated.

2. Select Option

Select the Detail mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawingannotation for user-created details in terms of the coordinate system with respect to theuser-defined, active scale.

— OR —

Select the Drawing View mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneousdrawing annotation in terms of the coordinate system with respect to a specific drawingview’s scale.

— OR —

Leave the Drawing mode to define PDS-specific key-ins for miscellaneous drawingannotation in terms the coordinate system with respect to the drawing’s scale.

3. Set the coordinate system toggle to Plant Coordinate System to define the key-ins interms of the Plant Coordinate System.

— OR —

Set the coordinate system toggle to Design Volume Coordinate System to define thekey-ins in terms of the coordinate system of the active design volume.

4. Set the connect point toggle to All Connect Points for the system to locate the connectpoints by numeric priority (CP1, CP2, ...).

— OR —

Set the connect point toggle to Nearest Connect Point for the system to locate theconnect point closest to the cursor position when you press <D>.

5. Specify the appropriate placement location for placing a combination label by pressing<D>.

219



220

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Select Another Drawing________________

5.3.5 Select Another Drawing

This command activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to exit the active drawingand activate another drawing in the project without exiting the drawing environment. You canalso exit the current design file and activate a different type drawing design file.

The Drawing Selection form is also used to Copy From Another Drawing and Copy AnotherDrawing.

Steps

1. Select File > File Options from the main menu bar.

2. Select the Select Another Drawing from the <File Options palette.

The system activates the Drawing Selection form with a list of available drawing types.


Select the type of drawing to be activated, and Accept the selected drawing type.

The system activates a list of drawings for the selected drawing type.

4. Select Drawing

Select the drawing to be activated, and select Accept.

The system exits the current drawing design file and displays the new active designdrawing without exiting the drawing environment.

221


5.4 Element

The Element pull-down provides the Analyze command .

Analyze

The Analyze option opens the Element Information settings box, which is used to changethe attributes of an element(s) and review design file data associated with them, such asgeometry and database attributes.

DO NOT use the Analyze command to change any properties of a PDS element.This feature should be used only as an investigative tool in PDS applications. It ispermissible to use this command on non-intelligent, user-defined elements in themodel file; however, use of this command should be limited to those elements.

When the Analyze command is active and a single graphics element is selected, the displayeddata pertains to that element. Use the Next command to display data on any nested elements.

The element type is shown in the title bar. The type number is shown in the upper left cornerof the settings box.

Refer to the MicroStation User’s Guide for more information on the Analyze command.

222

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

Settings________________

5.5 Settings

The Settings commands provide the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used duringa graphics session.

Command Groups

Colors — Modifies the colors used in the graphics environment. Use the File Designcommand from the File palette to save your settings before exiting the design file.

Each tile in the color palette represents a color in the active color table. To modify acolor, you must first select it. The selected color has an enlarged tile in which its indexnumber (0-255) is displayed. The view background color is in the lower right corner ofthe palette, denoted by "B."

Double-clicking a tile opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to modify thecolor.

Fonts — Opens the Fonts setting box. To see a type sample for a font, select in the listbox.

223

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Rendering — Opens the Rendering Settings box, which is used to adjust renderingsettings. It controls distance cuing, which determine how atmospheric fading is set inthe view. You can also set the Fog Color in this dialog box, which can be used to createa realistic atmospheric haze.

224

5.Grap

hics

En

viron

men

t

User________________

5.6 User

These commands provide access to PDS help and to the user preferences and buttonassignment that are specific to your system.

Help

Displays Help for the PDS 3D products.

User Preferences

The User Preferences command changes things that apply only to your system such as howmemory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screenare laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the nameimplies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.

Button Assignments

The Button Assignments command changes digitizing tablet or mouse button assignments.You can change the 3D Data and 3D Tentative buttons assignments, as well as 10 cursorbutton assignments for cursor button menus.

225


226

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Composing Drawings________________

6. Composing Drawings

Composing a drawing means defining the drawing views and placing them in theirappropriate locations within the drawing. This is done using the Drawing Composition /Annotation command. Selecting this command activates the graphics environment. Severalof the commands in the graphics environment have the same functionality as those foundoutside the graphics environment. For more information about the graphics environment,refer to Graphics Environment, page 195.

These commands are used to create drawings and composite drawing views, create and copydrawing views, and specify the characteristics necessary to place (compose) drawings.Additionally, you can attach and detach reference files, and add, remove, and review modelcategories.

These commands activate the same forms and functions as those used in the DrawingManager non-graphical environment.

Topics

Create Drawing View — Defines the drawing view by selecting a saved view definition,selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume, or setting the data coordinatesand clipping volume for a specifically defined named item.

Create Composite View — Creates a composite drawing view for a drawing by usingmultiple saved view definitions.

Copy Drawing View — Copies an existing drawing view to create a new view for the sameor another drawing.

Create Section View — Creates section lines for creating a composite drawing view of anelevation view.

Create Composite Plan View — Creates a composite plan view where the drawing view is

composed from an elevation view.

Compose Drawing — Controls the placement and characteristics of drawing views (orcomposite views) within the drawing border.

227


6.1 Create Drawing View

This option creates a drawing view for an existing drawing. You can specify the drawingview by using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting theorientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or by setting the datacoordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifed named item. Thesaved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view and defines theorientation.



Commands




228

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition




Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default linespacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.



— level = 1


— weight = 0

— line style = 0

Saved View — Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clippingvolume of the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238 for more information.

Named Item — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 232 formore information.

Define View Location — Defines the location of the drawing view within thedrawing border and automatically composes the drawing view. Refer to Define ViewLocation, page 239 for more information.

Although you will not be prompted to define the view location, you should usethis command between defining the view parameters and confirming the form.

229


Field Descriptions

View Number — Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view number(short code - up to 24 characters) for the drawing view to be created. The systemverifies that the drawing view number is unique within the project.

View Name — Place a data point in the field and key in the drawing view name (longdescription - up to 40 characters) associated with the specified drawing view.

View Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list and specify anew scale value for the drawing view. The default scale value is the same as the valueused when the drawing was created.




Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identifythe drawing view to be created.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describethe drawing view to be created.

Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation optionsfrom the center of the form.

Specify Clipping Volume Key in the view coordinates to define the clippingvolume. (The system does not have to have the Lowcoordinates in the Low field and the Highcoordinates in the High field; the command willwork properly as long as the coordinated entered arediagonally opposed.)

— OR —

Select the Named Item option to use the datacoordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view.Refer to Named Item, page 232 for moreinformation.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a saved viewmodel to define the orientation and clipping volumeof the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238for more information.

230

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition


Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed values.

Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline to be used to create the drawingview, and select Accept.

When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system displays the models forthe selected area. The Attach by Area setting will attach all reference modelsin the chosen area.

Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all the modelfiles for a specified area or to Select Models to specifythe individual reference models to be attached.



231


6.1.1 Named Item

This option activates the Create Drawing View from Named Item form. It is used to definethe data coordinates and clipping volume for a drawing view from a named item.




Field Descriptions




232

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Named Item________________

Commands


Select By Project — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enterthe item number. The system will search the entire project for that component.


Specify Component Number Set the Select By Model/Select By Project toggle to theappropriate setting, then select one of the Numbercommands to specify a named item. See Named Item byModel, page 234 and Named Item by Project, page 236for more information.

233


6.1.1.1 Named Item by Model

This toggle setting selects a named item in a specific model to define the delta coordinates andclipping volume to be used in the drawing view.




Commands

Select by Project — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a named itemthat resides anywhere in the project. First, you select a Number option and then enterthe item number. The system will search the entire project for that component.

Piping Component Number — Defines the type of named item as a pipingcomponent, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area thatcontains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected andconfirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.

Instrument Component Number — Defines the type of named item as an instrumentcomponent, then activates a series of forms that promt you to select the area thatcontains the model that contains the named item. Once an area is selected andconfirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specific named item.

Equipment Number — Defines the type of named item as an equipment item, thenactivates a series of forms that promt you to select the area that contains the model thatcontains the named item. Once an area is selected and confirmed, you must thenspecify the component number for the specific named item.

234

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Named Item by Model________________ Equipment Number & Nozzle Number — Defines the type of named item as anequipment item with a nozzle item, then activates a series of forms that promt you toselect the area that contains the model that contains the named item. Once an area isselected and confirmed, you must then specify the component number for the specificnamed item.

Select Model — Changes the model after one has already been selected through one ofthe Number options.

Field Descriptions

Delta Coordinates — Defines the distance from the center to the edges of the cubewhich fits the named item. When the named item has been defined, its deltacoordinates are displayed automatically. You can then change any of the DeltaCoordinates to revise the displayed clipping volume.




Select Area or Exit Select the area that contains the model that contains thenamed item, and select Accept.

Select Model or Exit Select the model that contains the named item, andselect Accept.

Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field left of the model-namedisplay field, key in the appropriate item number for thecomponent in the model and select and press <Enter>.


235


6.1.1.2 Named Item by Project

This option selects a named item from any of the models in the project to define the deltacoordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.




Commands


Piping Component Number — Defines the type of named item as a pipingcomponent.

Instrument Component Number — Defines the type of named item as an instrumentcomponent.

Equipment Number — Defines the type of named item as an equipment item.

Equipment Number & Nozzle Number — Defines the type of named item as anequipment item with a nozzle item.

236

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Named Item by Project________________

Field Descriptions





Specify Component Number Place a data point in the field and key in the appropriateitem number to specify either the Piping ComponentNumber, Instrument Component Number,Equipment Number, or Equipment Number &Nozzle Number for the named item in the project.


237


6.1.2 Saved View

This option creates a drawing view using a saved view to define the orientation, clippingvolume, and reference model inclusion. Reference models will not be filtered on the basis ofthe discipline defined using the Project Setup command but instead, will be availableregardless of their discipline if they are in the saved view.

When creating a drawing view using a model view that was saved prior to this enhancement,the Saved Model View command attaches the reference models active at the time the drawingview is created. Otherwise, the reference models associated with the model at the time thesaved model view was created are attached. You can revise the reference model attachments.



A saved view must have been defined while working in one of the PDS 3D-Modelingtasks.


Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline containing the model with the savedview, and select Accept.

Select Area or Exit Select the area containing the model with the savedview, and select Accept.

Select Model Select the model for the drawing view to be created, andselect Accept.

Select Saved View Select the saved view name for the drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.

238

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Define View Location________________

6.1.3 Define View Location

This option activates the Define View Location form. It is used to define the location of adrawing view relative to the cutting edge of the drawing border and composes itautomatically. The distance between the drawing view border and the drawing border isspecified in the drawplotsize file and is defined by the size of the drawing. Refer to theDrawing Plot Size Table section in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information.



Commands

Upper Left — Defines the drawing view location in the upper left quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Upper Right — Defines the drawing view location in the upper right quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Center — Defines the drawing view location in the center of the drawing view border.

Lower Left — Defines the drawing view location in the lower left quadrant of thedrawing view border.

Lower Right — Defines the drawing view location in the lower right quadrant of thedrawing view border.

239


Field Descriptions

x1 — Displays the x1 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of X-l as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

y1 — Displays the y1 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of Y-t as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

x2 — Displays the x2 distance from the drawing view border. This value correspondswith the value of X-r as described in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in thisdocument.

y2 — Displays the y2 distance from the drawing view border. Displays the x2 distancefrom the drawing view border. This value corresponds with the value of Y-b asdescribed in the fist discussion of the drawplotsize table in this document.


Specify Drawing View Location Place a data point on the button representing thequadrant where the drawing should be placed.

240

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Create Composite View________________

6.2 Create Composite View

This command activates the Create Composite Drawing View form. It is used to create acomposite view. A composite drawing view is a drawing view which is a composite ofseveral model views with different clipping volumes. You can define the views in acomposite drawing view by:

Setting the Clipping Volume to define a drawing view as a specific clipping volume(cube) in the model design file.

Specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model. The savedview definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.

For either of the above options, you can specify the active category data for the drawing view.

Commands

Orientation — Select one of the seven options to specify the viewing direction of thedrawing view.


The match lines drawn by this option will be displayed as a uniquedrawing category, Match Lines by System. As part of this enhancement,the user-defined drawing annotation category that was previously calledMatch Lines is now called Match Lines by User.

241

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The coordinate labels for this command will be displayed in theCoordinate Labels category, as are all other coordinate labels.

The coordinate label values are determined on the basis of the drawingview’s clipping boundary, as specified in the drawing management dataof the Project Control Database. A line spacing factor specified for thisoption through Project Data Manager will determine the distancebetween the match line and the coordinate label.

These coordinate labels will be respected by Update Labels, and theywill be appropriately re-drawn to the proper scale when the ReviseDrawing View or Move Drawing View commands are used.

Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the defaultline spacing for all other coordinate lables will be used.

The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label’s textwill be determined on the basis of the prefix or suffix option specified inProject Data Manager, as it is for any other coordinate label. If thecoordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphic symbologydata for the default coordinate label will be used.

The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the followingdefault values until you specify different values through Project DataManager:

– level = 1– color = 0 (white)– weight = 0– line style = 0

Define Views — Defines, revises, or rejects drawing views for the composite drawingview. See Define Views for Composite Drawing View, page 244 and Define CompositeDrawing With Saved View, page 246 for more information.

Define View Location — Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within thedrawing border and have the drawing view composed automatically. See Define ViewLocation, page 239 for more information.

Field Descriptions

Composite View Number — Key in the composite drawing view number (short name- up to 24 characters) for the composite drawing view to be created. The systemverifies that the number is unique within the project.

Composite View Name — Key in the view name (long description - up to 40characters) associated with the specified composite drawing view.

242

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Create Composite View________________ Composite View Scale — The scale value specified when the drawing was created isautomatically filled in. Select the field to activate a scale display list, and select fromthe available scale values to change the scale to be used for the composite drawingview.


Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identifythe composite drawing view to be created.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describethe composite drawing view to be created.

Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven view orientation optionsfrom the center of the form.

Select Individual Views Select Define Views to define, revise, or rejectdrawing views for the composite drawing view. SeeDefine Views for Composite Drawing View, page 93for more information.

— THEN —

Accept all of the specified views for the compositedrawing view to be created.

Accept or Select Another Option Select the Define View Location option to pre-define the location of the drawing view within thedrawing border and have the drawing viewcomposed automatically.

— THEN —

Accept all of the specified views for the compositedrawing view to be created.

Select Area or Exit Select the area to attach to the drawing view or thearea that contains the models to be attached.




243


6.2.1 Define Views for Composite Drawing View

This option activates the Drawing Views field. It is used to define, revise, or reject drawingviews for the composite drawing view.

Commands

Saved View — Defines the clipping volume for a drawing view using a model savedview. See Define Composite Drawing Views with Saved View, page 95 for moreinformation.

Reject View — Deletes the view from the selected composite drawing view.

Field Descriptions

Drawing Views — Displays the drawing views as they are defined. Each time adrawing view volume for a drawing view is defined, the system automatically updatesthis field. You may define up to ten views.

Drawing View Volume — Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use anegative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the secondcorner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first cornerpoint.


Specify Clipping Volume Specify the Drawing View Volume coordinates asfollows to define the individual drawing views forthe composite drawing view.

244

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Define Views for Composite Drawing View________________ Key in each coordinate individually or select theSaved View option to use a model saved view todefine the clipping volume for a drawing view. SeeDefine Composite Drawing Views with Saved View,page 95 for more information.

— OR —

Select a drawing view and select the Reject View todelete the view from the selected composite drawingview.

Accept or Select Another Option Accept all of the view definitions.

When this form is confirmed, the system creates the composite drawing viewin the database. The center of the MicroStation reference file attachment forthe first saved model view definition specified is used to position thecomposite drawing view during drawing composition. The system determinesthe location of the remaining reference file attachments for the correspondingsaved model view definitions relative to the first reference file attachment.The categories of data displayed and plotted in each of the drawing views isdetermined from the corresponding saved model view definitions used todefine the viewing direction and the clipping limits.

An example of a composite drawing view is shown below:

After creating the composite drawing view, the Attach Drawing View Models form isactivated to attach reference models. Refer to Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for moreinformation.

245


6.2.2 Define Composite Drawing With Saved View

The Saved View option on the Create Composite Drawing View form is used to specify amodel saved view to define the clipping volume of the composite drawing view being created.

You can create as many as ten drawing views, and the Drawing View block is updated aseach view is created.


The composite drawing view number, name, scale, and orientation must be specified on theCreate Composite Drawing View form in Drawing Manager.


Select Discipline or Exit Select the discipline for the composite drawing view tobe created, and select Accept.

Select Area or Exit Select the area for the composite drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.

Select Model Select the model for the composite drawing view to becreated, and select Accept.


Select Saved Model View Select the saved view name to be used to define theclipping volume of the composite drawing view, andAccept the view definition.

246

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition


6.2.3 Create Composite Drawing Views Example

You can create a composite drawing view and attach reference model files to individualdrawing views within the composite drawing view. The composite drawing view is thecomposite of up to ten drawing views and its volume is the composite volume of those views.

You’ll want to do this when, for example, the model looks like this:

And this is how you want the drawing file to look.

247


Before you create the composite drawing view, you’ll need to know the coordinates forall volumes to be used.

Write down two sets of coordinates (low and high) for each volume. These will definethe absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the two corner points forthe volume. The second point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.(You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negativeelevation.)

248

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition


Create composite drawing view name andnumber:


2. Select the discipline from the Drawing Type list, and confirm.

3. Select the drawing from the drawing list, and confirm.



6. Select the Composite View Scale field, select a value from the displayed list, andconfirm.

249



Define the views to be used in thecomposite drawing view:

1. Select Define Views to define, revise, or reject drawing views for the compositedrawing view.

You can define the views in one of two ways:

By specifying the volumes of the drawing views in the model design file (asspecified in the earlier example). When you do this, you are specifying theclipping volume.

By specifying a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model.The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view.

To define the views by specifying theclipping volume:

1. Key in all six coordinate values in the Drawing View Volume field for the first drawingview to be used in the composite drawing view, then confirm.

2. Key in coordinate values for each drawing view to be used in the composite drawingview, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in the compositedrawing view.


250

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition


3. After all of the drawing views are defined, exit the form.

4. Accept the form that appears, and the system updates the database.

To define the views by specifying a savedview:

Note that the saved views must already exist.

1. Select Saved View.

2. Select the discipline of the drawing view to be added, and confirm.

3. Select the area that contains the saved view, and confirm.

4. Select the model with the saved view to be used, and confirm.

5. Select the saved view to be used to define the clipping volume of the drawing view, andconfirm.

6. Continue to define the additional saved views that are to be used in the compositedrawing view, then confirm. You can define up to ten views to be used in thecomposite drawing view.


7. After all of the drawing views are defined, Accept the form.


251


8. Exit the form that appears.

Attach the drawing view models, andcomplete the composite drawing view:

1. Select the discipline and Accept.

2. Select the area to attach to the drawing view or the area that contains the models to beattached (or toggle Select Models to Select Area to attach all models in that area), thenconfirm.

3. If you did not toggle to Select Area, select the model to be used to attach the drawingview, then confirm.

4. If there are more reference files to attach, continue this same process. Otherwise, exit.

252

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Copy Drawing View________________

6.3 Copy Drawing View

This option activates the Copy Drawing View form. It is used to copy an existing drawingview for the same or a different drawing. This option also allows composite drawing views tobe copied.

When a drawing view of one drawing type is copied into a drawing of adifferent drawing type, this command will attach the deisciplines as specifiedfor the destination drawing type in Project Setup Manager.

Field Descriptions

Source Data

Drawing Type — Displays the discipline of the active drawing. You may select adifferent source drawing type by placing a data point in this field.

Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number. You may select a differentsource drawing number by placing a data point in this field.

View Number — Selecting this field activates a view number display list that promptsyou to select a view number for the specified source drawing.

253

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Destination Data

Drawing Number — Select the drawing number from a list of existing drawings whichwill receive the new drawing view.

Drawing View Number — Key in the drawing view number (up to 24 characters) forthe drawing view to be created.

Drawing View Name — Key in the drawing view name (up to 40 characters) for thenew drawing view.

Drawing View Scale — Select a scale value from the drawing view scale.

Composition Options

Define Location — Pre-defines the location of the drawing view within the drawingborder and composes the drawing view automatically. Within the graphics environment,this option is only active when the source and destination view numbers are the same.See Define View Location, page 239 for more information.

Do Not Compose — Attaches the view to the drawing, but does not compose it. Theview will not be displayed in graphics.

Compose Coincident — Defines the composition point of the destination drawingview to be the same as the source drawing view, when the drawing view is being copiedfrom a different drawing. Therefore, the drawing view will have the same location inthe destination drawing as in the source drawing. If the composition point for the sourcedrawing is not defined, this option is not active.

This allows drawing annotation to be shared using the Overlay Drawing Annotationoption. See the Overlay Drawing, page 338 for more information.




254

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Copy Drawing View________________






— level = 1


— weight = 0

— line style = 0


Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number of the drawingview to be copied.

Specify Drawing View Number Place a data point in the Drawing View Number:field and key in the drawing view number (up to 24characters) for the drawing view to be created. Theview number must be unique within the project. Ifyou key in a number currently in use, the system willdisplay an error message informing you that the viewnumber is not unique.

Specify Drawing View Name Place a data point in the Drawing View Name: fieldand key in the drawing view name (up to 40characters) for the new drawing view.

Accept to Copy Drawing View Accept the form and copy the drawing view.

255


6.4 Create Section View

This command activates the Create Section Drawing View form. It is used to create sectionlines for creating a composite drawing view of an elevation view. A fence shape is specifiedto define the clipping volume of the section view. You can specify the section drawing viewby using a saved view definition created for a screen view in the model, selecting theorientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to be used, or setting the datacoordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for a specifically defined nameditem. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits for the drawing view anddefines the orientation.


If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created inthe model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24characters) for the drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the drawingview number is unique within the project.

View Name — Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40characters) associated with the specified drawing view.

View Scale — The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing wascreated. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list.Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created.

Drawing View Volume — Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, andElevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (Youcan use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

256

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Create Section View________________ Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for thesecond corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the firstcorner point.

Commands

Named Item — Uses the data coordinates and clipping volume of a specifically definednamed item to create the drawing view. Refer to Named Item, page 232 for moreinformation.

Saved View — Uses a saved view model to define the orientation and clipping volumeof the drawing view. Refer to Saved View, page 238 for more information.


Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identifythis drawing view.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describethis drawing view.

Select Drawing View OrientationSelect one of the five view orientation options fromthe center of the form to specify the orthographicview.

Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fieldsfrom the center of the form, and key in the viewcoordinates to define the drawing view volume.

— OR —

Select the Named Item option to use the datacoordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a saved viewmodel to define the orientation and clipping volumeof the drawing view.

Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed coordinate values.


Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.

257




The system uses the default model data categories defined using the ProjectSetup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the modelsselected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories.

Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing tocompose the section view. The section view iscomposed initially as a plan view.

Identify Fence Points Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape todefine the clipping volume of the section view. Thefence points are axis locked automatically.

Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing viewvolume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An errormessage is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shapeexceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A compositedrawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-displayed with the specified elevation view orientation.

258

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Create Composite Plan View________________

6.5 Create Composite PlanView

This option activates the Create Composite Plan Drawing View form. It is used to createcomposite plan views where the drawing view is composed from an elevation view. You canspecify the section drawing view by using a saved view definition created for a screen view inthe model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volume coordinates to beused, or setting the data coordinates and clipping volume to create a drawing view for aspecifically defined named item. The saved view definition identifies the clipping limits forthe drawing view and defines the orientation.


If you plan to use a saved view to define the drawing view, the saved view must be created inthe model before selecting this command. See the section describing Saved View.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Select and key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24characters) for the composite plan drawing view to be created. The system verifies thatthe drawing view number is unique within the project.

View Name — Select and key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40characters) associated with the specified composite plan drawing view.

View Scale — The system displays the scale value defined when the drawing wascreated. You can use this scale value, or select the field to activate a scale display list.Then, select a new scale value for the drawing view to be created.

259

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Drawing View Volume — Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, andElevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (Youcan use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Select and key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for thesecond corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the firstcorner point.

Commands

Place Match Lines / No Match Lines — Places match lines and the correspondingcoordinate labels when the drawing view is created. The match lines will be placed atthe clipping boundaries of the drawing view. The corresponding coordinate labels willbe placed parallel to each match line on the side away from the contents of the drawingviews.







260

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Create Composite Plan View________________ The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following defaultvalues until you specify different values through Project Data Manager:

— level = 1


— weight = 0

— line style = 0


Specify Drawing View Number Key in up to 24 alphanumeric characters to identifythis composite plan drawing view.

Specify Drawing View Name Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to describethis composite plan drawing view.

Select Drawing View OrientationSelect one of the four initial view direction optionsfrom the center of the form to specify the viewingdirection.

Specify Clipping Volume Select each of the Drawing View Volume fieldsfrom the center of the form, and key in the viewcoordinates to define the drawing view volume.

— OR —

Select the Named Item option to use the datacoordinates and clipping volume of a specificallydefined named item to create the drawing view.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a saved viewmodel to define the orientation and clipping volumeof the drawing view.

Accept or Select Other Options Accept the displayed coordinate values.


Select Area or Exit Select the Area to be used to attach the drawing view.Set the toggle to Attach by Area to attach all themodel files for a specified area or to Select Modelsto specify the individual reference models to beattached.

261


Select Model Select the model to be used to attach the drawingview.

The system uses the default model data categories defined using the ProjectSetup command to determine which categories will be displayed in the modelsselected. If no defaults are set, the system displays the categories.

Identify Origin Place a data point to identify the origin in the drawing tocompose the section view. The section view iscomposed initially as a plan view.

Identify Fence Points Place a series of data points to specify a fence shape todefine the clipping volume of the section view. Thefence points are axis locked automatically.

Rectangular coordinates are formed from the fence points and the initial drawing viewvolume to form the individual drawing views of the composite drawing view. An errormessage is displayed if the number of individual drawing views formed by the fence shapeexceeds the maximum number of drawing views per composite drawing view. A compositedrawing view is formed automatically to define the section view, and the drawing view is re-displayed with the specified elevation view orientation.

262

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Compose Drawing________________

6.6 Compose Drawing

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement andcharacteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border.You can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with aseries of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphicscan be viewed in the drawing environment.

Field Descriptions

Number — Displays the number (up to 24 characters) that identifies the drawing view.

Name — Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.

Scale — Displays the scale of the drawing view.

Composed — Displays the composition status (Yes or No) of the drawing view.

Commands


Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will displayon the screen and on plotted drawings.

Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selectedreference models.

263

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information fromthe reference models into the active file.

Compose Drawing View — Select to place the active drawing view within thedrawing border.

Reference Models — Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models, add,remove, and review model categories. Refer to Reference Models, page 269 for moreinformation.

Delete Drawing View — Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawingview for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection.

The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the databasefiles and deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from thedrawing. It also detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view.

Align Drawing View — Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views.Refer to Align Drawing View, page 286 for more information.

Revise View Data — Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the activedrawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise View Data, page 288 formore information.

Revise Orientation — Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawingview (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise Orientation, page 290 for moreinformation.

Unassigned Views — Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you canchoose a view to be composed. Refer to Unassigned Views, page 292 for moreinformation.


Select Drawing View Select the appropriatect drawing view number from thelist of drawing views.

Select Options Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawingviews) to on or off, then select any other appropriateoption.

264

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Compose Drawing View________________

6.7 Compose Drawing View

This option lets you specify the origin at which to place the active drawing view within thedrawing border.

This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline ofeach drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawingcategory for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics. An example of a drawing view outline is shownin the following figure.

265


Field Descriptions

Number — Displays the number (up to 24 characters) that identifies the drawing view.

Name — Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.

Scale — Displays the scale of the drawing view.


Commands






Until you specify the line spacing in Project Data Manager, the default line spacing for allother coordinate lables will be used.

The remaining graphic symbology data for the coordinate label’s text will be determined onthe basis of the prefix or suffix option specified in Project Data Manager, as it is for anyother coordinate label. If the coordinate label does not have a prefix or suffix, the graphicsymbology data for the default coordinate label will be used.

The graphic symbology for the match lines will use the following default values until youspecify different values through Project Data Manager:

level = 1

266

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Compose Drawing View________________ color = 0 (white)

weight = 0

line style = 0

This option also places MicroStation construction class graphics that represent the outline ofeach drawing view. The graphic parameters for the outline are defined by the drawingcategory for Non-plotted Drawing Graphics.


Identify Origin Place a data point within the drawing border to locatethe center of the drawing view.

Notes

When the Compose Drawing form is active, you can move any drawing view(or composite drawing view) within the drawing border. You can drag theoutline of the drawing views to confirm that the views fit within the drawingborder and do not accidentally overlap other drawing views.

You can overlap another drawing view if necessary — to show a detail viewwithin an elevation view, for example. You can also confirm the drawing viewscale and the size of the drawing border.

The system will automatically define a display depth large enough to displaythe drawing view graphics.

267


To move a drawing view within the border file, snap to the outline (or anyelement) of the drawing view to be moved. Then drag the highlighted graphicsto the preferred location and press <D> to accept the location.

The move does not affect any annotation graphics associated with the drawingview. Therefore, you should not move the drawing view once the drawingsheet has been annotated with dimensioning, labels, etc. (You can use theUpdate Labels command to re-attach intelligent labels after moving orredefining a drawing view. However, this does not update dimensioning ordumb labels.)

268

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Reference Models________________

6.7.1 Reference Models

This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It contains a list ofthe current reference models attached to the active drawing view. The form contains optionsthat copy drawings, attach and detach models, and add, remove, and review model categories.



The active drawing view must be specified on the Compose Drawing form.

Field Descriptions

Disc/Model Number — Displays one character to identfiy the discipline, and displaysthe model number.

Description — Displays the description assigned to the model.

DSP SNP LOC — Displays the model’s Display, Snap, and Locate toggle status.

Commands


Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display

269

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ on the screen and on plotted drawings.

Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selectedreference models.

Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information fromthe reference models into the active file.

Apply to Active / Discipline / All — Assigns the Display, Snap, and Locate togglesettings to either the active drawing view only, or to all drawing views in the samediscipline as the active drawing view, or to all possible drawing views in all disciplines.

Copy Active Drawing — Used to copy reference file attachments from the drawingviews in the active drawing.

Copy Another Drawing — Copies reference model attachments from drawing viewin the project.

Attach Model — Attaches reference models to a specified drawing view.

Automatic Attach & Verify — Automatically attaches reference files for the activedrawing view. It displays a list of all models in the project that are within the range ofthe selected drawing view volume.

Detach Model — Removes the reference file from a specified drawing view (deletesthe reference model entry).

Reference Model Categories — Reviews/revises, adds, or deletes model categoriesfor the active reference model.

Reload Reference Model — Automatically reloads all selected reference models for adrawing view.


Select Model Select a model from the list, then make any necessaryrevisions to the toggle settings, then select an optionfrom the bottom of the form.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit.

270

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Copy Active Drawing________________

6.7.1.1 Copy Active Drawing

This option activates the Drawing View Selection form. It is used to copy reference modelattachments from the specified active drawing view. First, the system displays the DrawingView Selection list. After a drawing view is selected and accepted, the system then displaysthe Copy Drawing View Attachments form which allows you to copy models from theselected drawing view.

Commands


Field Descriptions


Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing ViewSelection form .




271



Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number that contains thereference model attachments to be copied, and Acceptthe drawing view.

Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied. Allunhighlighted reference models will be copied. SelectAccept to copy the specified models.

272

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Copy Another Drawing________________

6.7.1.2 Copy Another Drawing

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It allows you to copy reference modelattachments from any drawing view in the project. First, the Drawing Types list displays.After a drawing type is selected and accepted, the Drawing Selection list displays whichallows you to define models from a specific drawing model. After a drawing is selected andaccepted, the Drawing View Selection list displays. After a drawing view is selected andaccepted, the Copy Drawing View Attachments list displays which allows you to copymodels from the selected drawing views.

Commands


Field Descriptions


Drawing Number — Displays the active drawing number on the Drawing ViewSelection form .




273



Select Drawing Type Select the type of drawing to be copied.

Select Drawing Select the drawing that contains the reference modelattachments to be copied, and Accept the drawing.

Select Drawing View Select the Drawing View Number that contains thereference model attachments to be copied, and Acceptthe drawing view.

Select Model Select only those models that should not be copied. Allunhighlighted reference models will be copied. SelectAccept to copy the specified models.

274

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Attach Model________________

6.7.1.3 Attach Model

This option is used to attach reference models to specified drawing views.

Field Descriptions

Discipline — Displays the disciplines available for you to select.

Area — Displays the numbers that identify the areas found in the selected discipline.

Area Description — Displays the description of the areas found in the selecteddiscipline.

Commands

Automatic Attach & Verify — Automatically attaches reference files to the activedrawing view. It displays all the models within the project that have elements withinthe clipping volume of the active drawing view. The system highlights the referencemodels which are already attached.

Select Models / Attach by Area — Controls method of model selection. When thetoggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the models with the drawing typespecified in the Project Setup command. The Attach by Area setting will attach allreference models in the chosen area. If the Project Setup command was not used, thesystem will display the model data categories that were active when each model wascreated.


Select Discipline or Exit Select a discipline, and select Accept.

275


Select Area or Exit Select an area, and select Accept.

When the toggle is set to Select Models, the system will display the modelswith the drawing type specified in the Project Setup command. The Attachby Area setting will attach all reference models in the chosen area. If theProject Setup command was not used, the system will display the model datacategories that were active when each model was created.

Select Model Select the model to attach to the drawing view.


276

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Automatic Attach & Verify________________

6.7.1.4 Automatic Attach & Verify

This option activates the Drawing View Ref Model Attachments form. It is used toautomatically attach reference files to the active drawing view. It displays all the modelswithin the project that have elements within the clipping volume of the active drawing view.The system highlights the reference models which are already attached.

Commands

All Disciplines/Pre-Defined Disciplines — The Pre-Defined Disciplines setting filtersthe reference models by the discipline defined for the drawing type using the ProjectSetup command. The All Disciplines setting displays all reference models in thedrawing view volume selected, regardless of the discipline.

Propogated / Sparse Models — Only applicable for projects using ModelDraft, thistoggle limits the Automatic Attach / Verify form to show only propogated or sparsemodels in the reference model display list. Propogated and sparse models cannot beattached simultaneously, unless propogated and sparse graphics are included in thesame model.

Field Descriptions

Disc/Model Name — Displays a list of the currently-attached models on the ReferenceModels form.


Toggle (Pre-Defined/All) and AcceptSet the toggles to the appropriate settings.

277


Select Model Select the models from the displayed referencefile list.

Accept or Select Additional Models Accept the reference models to be attached to theactive drawing view.

278

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Detach Model________________

6.7.1.5 Detach Model

This option is used to detach reference model attachments from a specified drawing view.

Field Descriptions

Disc/Model Number — Displays the discipline and model number for currently-attached models.

Description — Displays the description for each of the currently-attached models.


Select Model Select the reference models to be detached fromthe active drawing view.

Accept or Select Additional Models Accept the highlighted reference model as themodel to be detached, or select another model.

279


6.7.1.6 Reference Model Categories

This option activates the Model Categories form. It is used to review, revise, add, andremove reference model categories for a selected view.

Commands

Review/Revise — Reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayedin a selected view.

Add — Adds model categories (display levels) to a selected view.

Remove — Removes model categories (display levels) from a selected view.

All Model Graphics — Selects all categories on the display list to be either added orremoved, depending on the action being performed. This option is only applicable forthe Add and Remove commands.

Selected Model Only / All Piping Reference — Restricts the system to use either theselected model only, or all piping reference models.


Select View Select a view for which you want to revise thereference model categories.

Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or revise the active categoriesin the display list. Active categories arehighlighted, and the selected action will beperformed on them when the form is accepted.Placing a data point on a category that is currentlyturned on will turn it off.

280

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Reference Model Categories________________

Accept or Select Categories Accept the current revisions, or make furtherrevisions to the status of the categories.

281


6.7.1.6.1 Review/Revise

This option is the default option on the Model Categories form. It is already selected whenthe form is activated. It reviews and revises the model categories (display levels) displayedfor a selected view.

Commands



Select View Place a data point to identify the view to bereviewed. All categories that are highlighted areturned on for display.

Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or revise the active categoriesin the display list. Active categories arehighlighted, and the selected action will beperformed on them when the form is accepted.Placing a data point on a category that is currentlyturned on will turn it off.

Accept or Select Categories Accept the current revisions, or make furtherrevisions to the status of the categories.

282

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Add Category________________

6.7.1.6.2 Add Category

This option is used to add drawing categories for display in a selected view. You can specifythat all graphics be turned on for display, or that only specific categories be turned on.

Commands


All Model Graphics — Activates all model graphics categories so that they will bedisplayed.


Select View Place a data point to identify the view to display theadded categories.

Select Category Select the categories to turn on in the view.

Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and selectother categories to be added.

283


6.7.1.6.3 Remove Category

This command removes the model categories that are turned on in a selected view. Thecategories are removed (deactivated) by de-highlighting them.

Commands


All Model Graphics — Turns off all model graphics categories so that they will not bedisplayed.


Select View Place a data point to identify the view from whichto remove categories.

Select Category Select the categories to turn off in the view.

Select View or Revise Categories Select another view, or select Restart and selectother categories to be removed.

284

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Delete Drawing View________________

6.7.2 Delete Drawing View

This option deletes the selected drawing view (or composite drawing view).


Accept to Delete Drawing View Select Accept to delete the selected drawing view anddetach the MicroStation reference file attachments forthe drawing view.

285


6.7.3 Align Drawing View

This option enables you to align two or more existing (composed) drawing views using anintelligent model graphic (such as a piping component or equipment nozzle) which iscommon to all views.


Identify Item Place a data point to identify an item in oneof the drawing views to be aligned.

Accept/Reject Press <D> to accept the highlighted item orpress <R> to reject the item and makeanother selection.

Identify Drawing View to Align Snap to the border of the drawing view tobe aligned, or select the desired view fromthe list on the form.

Accept/Reject Drawing View Press <D> to accept the highlighted item orpress <R> to reject the item and makeanother selection. When the highlighteditem is accepted, the system displays twointersecting dotted lines connecting theidentified component to the correspondingcomponent in the view to be aligned.

286

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Align Drawing View________________ An example of the intersecting lines isshown in the following figure.

Accept/Reject Drawing View Alignment

Press <D> to accept the displayed drawingview alignment, or press <R> to reject thealignment and view an alternativealignment. When the drawing viewalignment is accepted, the systemrepositions the drawing view so that theselected component is positioned at thepoint of intersection of the displayed lines.

The system repeats the prompts until youaccept an alignment.

287


6.7.4 Revise View Data

This option activates the Revise Drawing View Data form. It is used to revise the clippingvolume and view scale of an existing drawing view (or composite drawing view) that hasalready been composed. When revising composite drawing view data, the form containsadditional options for Orientation and Redefine Individual Views. Refer to ReviseComposite Drawing View Data, page 112 for more information.


The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Displays the current number for the selected view. You can key in anew one, if needed.

View Name — Displays the current name for the selected view. You can key in a newone, if needed.

View Scale — Displays the current scale of the selected view. You can change thescale by placing a data point in this field. The list of available scales will activate, andyou will be prompted to select the desired scale.

Drawing View Volume — Displays the current clipping volume associated with theactive drawing view.


Select Attribute for Revision Select any field on the form for revision.

288

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Revise View Data________________ You can rescale the drawing view by selecting the ViewScale field to activate the scale display list and selectinga new scale value. The clipping limits are also scaled asa result of this operation.

To revise any of the drawing view volume coordinates,select the associated field and key in the new value.You can key in a negative value to specify a westing,southing, or elevation coordinate.

The drawing view in the following figure illustrates anexample of a revised clipping volume.

Specify Drawing View Scale Select a scale value from the display list.

When the view scale is revised, the system revises the scale in the Drawing View (orComposite Drawing View) entity so that any drawing view scale displayable attribute labelsin the drawing for this drawing view can be updated. The system updates the clipping volumefor the active drawing view to reflect the new coordinate settings.

289


6.7.5 Revise Orientation

This option activates the Revise Orientation form. It is used to revise the orientation for theactive drawing view. The current orientation for the active drawing view is highlighted on theform.


The active drawing view must be selected on the Compose Drawing form.

Field Descriptions

View Number — Displays the number that identifies the active drawing view.

View Name — Displays the name that describes the active drawing view.

Degrees Rotated — Key in the number of degrees you want to rotate the view. Thisfield is only applicable when Rotated View is selected.

Commands

Rotate Drawing View: Model X, Model Y, Model Z — Rotates the active drawingview around either the X, Y, or Z axis. This option is only applicable when RotatedView is selected.


Select Drawing View Orientation Select one of the seven orientations from the form tospecify the new orientation, or select Rotated Viewto activate the Model X, ModelY, or Model Zoptions. Then select an option to rotate the currentorientation.

290

6.Draw

ing

C

om

po

sition

Revise Orientation________________

Keyin Angle (0-360) Key in the angle by which to rotate the drawing viewabout the selected axis. Positive values will rotatecounter-clockwise, while negative values will rotateclockwise.

If the rotated view does not fall into one of the seven standard orientations, theorientation is displayed as Rotated View.

A revised orientation example for a drawing view is shown below.

291


6.7.6 Unassigned Views

This option is used to assign previously-created unassigned views to a drawing. You canselect a view to be composed from a displayed list. Any views selected from the list and leftuncomposed will be unassigned and available for later selection.


Unassigned drawing views must have been previously created with the Project Planner.Refer to Project Planner, page 423 for more information about unassigned views.

Steps

1. Select the Unassigned Views option from the Compose Drawing form.

The system activates the Select Unassigned Views form which lists all the unassignedviews for each orientation.

2. Select the orientation of the unassigned view to be placed.

3. Select the view to be assigned.

4. Select Accept to return to the Compose Drawing form.


292

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Annotating Drawings________________

7. Annotating Drawings

These commands are used to place annotation graphics in the drawing to fully document thedrawing views. You can also update existing labels to reflect changes to the model.

Topics

Mass Annotation — Automatically labels one drawing view at a time. ASCII files controlwhich object types are available for labeling, and how these objects are to be labeled.

Place Labels Activates a form that is a synthesis of the older Name Label and CoordinateLabel commands. If you prefer, you may still use the older Name Label and CoordinateLabel commands to place your labels.

Equipment Center Lines — Automatically places center lines on equipment types that havebeen designated to receive them. ASCII files control which object types receive centerlinelabels, how these labels are placed.

Update Labels — Updates displayable attribute drawing labels and coordinate labels toagree with changes in the model. It can also be used to reposition labels or edit user-definedtext in a label.

Revision Markers — Places a revision triangle or revision cloud on a drawing with thespecified type of revision marker to be placed.

Display Report Places a report in a drawing. It activates the Display Report form whichcontains a list of the available drawing reports.

Place Cell — Places a user-defined cell in a drawing.

Place Text and Line — Places user-defined text and leader lines.

293


Overlay Drawing — Attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the activedrawing to share drawing annotations between related drawings.

Review Attribute — Displays the attribute values of the identified piping component orsegment, or of the selected equipment item or nozzle. It also displays selected attributeinformation for MDR, HVAC, and raceway components. This option displays user dataassociated with the identified element and PDS markers placed in the file.

Measure Distance — Measures the distance between any two components, or inquires thelocation of any component in terms of the project’s Plant Coordinate System.

Drawing Annotation Symbology — Updates the active line weight, symbology, color, andtext size values according to definitions made during project setup.

Name Label — Selects the type of label to be placed. This command is used to placeannotation graphics, text, and labels on the drawing view.

Coordinate Label — Selects the coordinate values to be labeled and to specify the form ofthe coordinate label.

Automatic Labels — Labels one or more drawing views automatically with the specifiedtype of label. It can also be used to label the contents of a fence and to define componentsearch criteria to restrict the elements to be labeled.

294

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Mass Annotation________________

7.1 Mass Annotation

The Mass Annotation command allows simple, automatic placement of annotation labels onselected drawing views. You select from a list the drawing types and the objects to belabeled, then you select the desired type of label for each object.


Both the Reference Data Manager and the Project Administrator modules have setupissues that are concerned with the Mass Annotation command; both modules contain a formused to control aspects of automatic label placement. The form used in the Label LibraryManager in PD_Data is used to control Mass Annotation settings for name labels, and theform used in PD_Project controls Mass Annotation settings for coordinate labels.

This form allows you to specify the following options for use with the Mass Annotationcommand in PD_Draw:

Are Previously Labeled Objects to be Labeled?

This option allows you to prevent labeling of objects that have already been labeled, ifdesired. If the setting to re-label values that are incorrect is used, the system will updatethe label value, then move on to the next label.

Are Objects Clipped by Drawing View Bounds to be Labeled?

Allows you to prevent labeling of objects only partially included within the drawingview. An option is provided to label only objects whose labeling point is within thebounds of the active drawing view.

295

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Are Objects Hidden by Other Objects to be Labeled?

Allows you to prevent labeling of objects that would not be partially or totally visibleafter vector-hidden lines have been processed. Options include labeling of objectswhose labeling points are visible, not labeling partially-hidden objects, and not labelingcompletely hidden objects.

Each label definition form in the Label Description Library of Reference Data Managerhas a Mass Annotation Data option. Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)Reference Guide for more information.

A Mass Annotation Data option is also available while defining drawing seed data orindividual drawing files’ data in Project Administrator. Refer to the Project Administrator(PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information.

The Mass Annotation command uses Code List 31 (Object Type) to control some aspects ofautomatic label placement. The command is also dependent on the presence of the followingASCII files in the project directory:

<yyy>_object.dwg (where yyy is eqp or in)

labels.<xxx> (where xxx is the numerical code-listed value of the drawing types beingannotated)

These files control which object types are to be labeled, and which types of labels are placedon those drawing types. These files are described below, and sample files (applicable todrawing type 665) are delivered to the project directory. You will need to create similar filesfor each drawing type that you wish to be available in the Mass Annotation command.

Which object types in a given drawing viewwill be available for labeling by users of theMass Annotation command?

The eqp_object.dwg file lists the equipment object types (ranging 120-140, as listed inStandard Note 31: Object Type) for which the Mass Annotation command allows you to placelabels. The in_object.dwg file lists the instrumentation object types available to the MassAnnotation command. Object types other than those listed in Standard Note 31 will not beavailable for use by the Mass Annotation command.

These files also specify the equipment parametric form numbers for each object available forMass Annotation.

!Object Type Parametric Definition Forms!—————————————————————-120 A001,A003 !Equipment Platform124 A051 !Equipment Handrail128 A015,A016 !Equipment Penetration130 A041 !Equipment Stair135 A021,A031 !Equipment Ladder140 A061,A063 !Equipment Davit

296

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n


How will specific object types be labeled?

The labels.<xxx> files are named such that the file extensions are the numerical code-listedvalues of the drawing types (from Standard Note 2000) being annotated. For instance, thedelivered sample labels.665 corresponds with the drawing type delivered as PipingPerspectives, Plans, Sections and Details because that drawing type is defined as code 665in Standard Note 2000.

The labels.<xxx> files define which label numbers and search criteria apply to a particularobject type (from Standard Note 31) in the particular drawing type being annotated. For eachpiping object type, there are two possible entries: one without search criteria and one withsearch criteria defined in Report Manager (PD_Report).

For piping segments, only the longest segment for any given line ID will belabeled.

Search criteria is valid only for piping object types. For more information oncreating search criteria, refer to Search Criteria Data Form, page 165.

The labels.<xxx> files follow the rules listed below:

Name labels are specified by the number given to them in the Label DescriptionLibrary.

Coordinate labels are specified the character C.

Labels can be placed individually or in combination according to the followingconvention:

— A comma (,) specifies single label placement; use a comma (,) between all singlelabel specifications. Examples: the string 2, 7, 10 specifies that name labels 2, 7,and 10 are available for placement for that object type; the string 5, C specifies thatthe single name label 5 and a coordinate label (designated later in this list as C) areavailable for placement for that object type.

— A dash (-) specifies the availability of all the labels in the given range. Example:the string 10-15 specifies the availability of name labels 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15for that particular object.

— A plus (+) specifies the availability of a combined name label and coordinate label.Example: the string 5, 12+C specifies availability of name label 5, and thecombination of name label 12 and a coordinate label.

Note that the coordinate label portion of a combination label may berejected by the Reject Label command, described later in thischapter, but the entire combination label will be rejected if the namelabel porton is rejected.

— SC = specifies availability of labels for piping items matching the given searchcriteria definition. Example: the string SC = YOUR_SEARCH_CRIT_NAME,

1, C specifies that all piping components meeting the given search criteria willreceive both a name label 1 and a coordinate label.

297

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The sample labels.665 file is listed below:

!Drawing Type = 665!ObjectType Search Criteria Number Label Numbers!—————————————————————-!Piping Object Types205 1 !Piping Segment210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component215 3 + C !Piping Specialty217 8 !Pipes220 13, 15 !Piping Support250 5 !In-Line Instrument255 5 !On-Line Instrument260 5 !Off-Line Instrument!Equipment Object Types101 12 + C !Equipment Group110 6, C !Equipment Nozzle!EERWAY Object Types300 17, C !EERWAY Connect Point

The information in the above sample file controls label placement for both piping andequipment object types in drawings of type 665. For examples of the previously explainedconvention, refer to the line describing the labels to be placed for piping object type 210:

210 2, 7, 10-11, C !Piping Component

This type of piping component can be annotated by name labels 2, 7, 10, 11, and a coordinatelabel.

Options

Label Only — Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command andthe drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. Youmay then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify thedesired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.(Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)

Label Placement Options — Determine placement of the label’s text along the leaderline.

Above - Places the label’s text above the leader line.

Below - Places the label’s text below the leader line.

— On — - Places the label’s text on the leader line, and places no character other thanthose in the label’s text.

298

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Mass Annotation________________ [On] - Places the label’s text on the leader line, and between brackets.

— End - Places the label’s text at the end of the leader line.

Justification Options (Just) — Activates a palette of options used to set the position oftext relative to its origin.

These options are the PDS interface for automating the MicroStation Text Justificationfeature. The letters on each button have the following meanings:

— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center

— M = margin (applicable to multi-line labels only)

For example, select R M B to place the origin at the right margin on the bottom line oftext in a multi-line label, or select C C to place the origin at the absolute center of thelabel.

Refer to the MicroStation documentation if you need more informationabout text justification.

Text Size — Defines the label text size. Select the active text size from the list box orselect Select From Label to set the active text size to that of an existing label.

Active Angle: — Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Setthe With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.

299

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Horizontal — Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.

Vertical — Defines the orientation for the active label as vertical.

Reject Labeling Point — Rejects the default labeling point on the object being labeled.You will be prompted to specify a new labeling point.

Reject Label — Rejects the label being placed, places a rejected label markerindicating that the label has been rejected, and continues on to label the rest of theselected objects. The system places rejected labels on a level 63 (delivered as MassAnnotation Rejected Labels). The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, willnot attempt to replace a rejected label until the rejected label marker is deleted using theDelete Element command.

Skip Current Label — Bypasses the label being placed, and continues on to label therest of the selected objects. The system, upon subsequent labeling operations, willattempt to place a label at this same point.

Continually selecting the Skip Current Label option will cycle through all possiblemass annotation label placement points.

Window Center to Item — Shifts the window center to correspond with the placementpoint of the active object, centering the object on your screen.

Active Working View — Allows selection of the working view to be displayed. Selectthe number of the view you wish to be the working view for annotation. The viewnumbers are equivalent to the Microstation view numbers.

300

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n


Steps

1. Select the Mass Annotation command from the Annotation palette.

The system displays the Drawing Bounds form and prompts you to select the desireddrawing view(s) to be annotated.

2. Select the desired drawing view(s) you wish to annotate, then Accept the highlightedselections.

The system displays the Select Object and Label Type form and prompts you to selectan object type to be labeled.

301


3. Select the object type to be annotated.

The system updates the form to display the object types available for mass annotation ofthe selected drawing type and prompts you to select labels for that object type, or toselect another drawing type.

4. Select the appropriate labels for the object types to be annotated, then Accept thehighlighted selections and activate Mass Annotation’s Place Labels form. The systemprocesses the mass annotation data, and activates a variation of the Place Labels form.You will be prompted to perform the next step in the label placement sequence for thetype of label being placed. (If leader lines are available for that type of label, you willbe prompted to place the second data point; the first label data point is label point 1 bydefault, as defined for that equipment in the Equipment Modeling module.)

302

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n


5. At this point you may modify, reject, or skip the active label. To place and accept alabel, place the desired data points to define the leader line, then Accept the activelabel.

The system determines the next label placement point, and prompts you to perform thenext step in the label placement sequence.

The Mass Annotation command uses placement point 1 as the defaultplacement point for labels’ leader lines. You can override this setting duringplacement.

303


7.2 Place Labels

The Place Labels command is a synthesis of the older Name Label and Coordinate Labelcommands found in previous versions of the Drawing Manager module. The Name Labeland Coordinate Label commands are still available for you to use if you so prefer.

Labels placed on equipment items that are not associated with a Datum Pointmay not act as expected when the Update Labels command is used. If theview scale is altered, or if the Datum Point is relocated, the label will maintainits previous distance and relationship to the Datum Point.

Options

Label Only — Places the label only (no leader lines). You can cancel the labelplacement with the reset button.



304

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Labels________________ Below - Places the label’s text below the leader line.


[On] - Places the label’s text on the leader line, and between brackets.


Coordinate Sequence — Displays the current sequence in which coordinate valueswill be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change thissequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences foryou to choose from.

Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels createdprior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to havebeen defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation.

Supplementary Text Options — You can specify that the coordinate label be createdwith supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, whichconsists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and thecoordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefixor suffix.

Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawing’s seed data (Type 63)through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.

Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list ofspecial text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the systemprompts for the text.

The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project DataManager section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide forinformation on defining these values. Some of these options are only valid whenlabeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.

305

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Bottom of Pipe — If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevationcoordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labelsto have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated whenselected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.

Face of Flange — If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the boltedend of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-halfgasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-flange, so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This commandverifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, aninstrument component, or a nozzle.

Top of Steel — If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highestelevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you doso, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-steel.

Top of Concrete — If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is thehighest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Top of Platform — If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is theelevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate issupported.

If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following ruleswill apply:

The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, ratherthan the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if ahorizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.

Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing viewdefinition or the platform which it describes.

If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following ruleswill apply:

The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.

The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipment’s parametricshape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will bedisplayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.

Bottom of Duct — If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is thelowest elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Text Drag Off/On — Defines if the label text is placed using drag mode or not. Afterthe leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode.Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the draggedtext, select Accept.

306

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Labels________________ Def Line Style / Alt Line Style — Set to designate use of the default or alternate linestyle. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. Thecenterline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this valuedifferently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.

Line Term Off/On — Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinatelabel has a line terminator.

The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if theline terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, agap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line.The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.

Axis Lock On/Off — When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock forplacement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axislock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can belocked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segmentmay not be locked to a drawing axis.

Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, anddeactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices.

Active Leader Line On/Off — Set to On to place the leader line defined with theDefine Active Leader Line option. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the labeldescription library for the selected label.

You can select an alternate line style for any leader line that is used as a centerlineextension without affecting name labels’ text, label enclosures, or line terminators.

Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label — Toggle to place a name label only, or toplace a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. See Name Label, page 346for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created with thiscommand can be updated using the Update Labels commands.

The text for the coordinate labels and the name labels are associated for move,modify, and delete operations. However, the data structure of the combinationlabel distinguishes between the text for the coordinate label and the text for thename label when updating the labels.

The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation levelassociated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representingthe name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on theMicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.

Add Label Below/Add Label Above — Toggle used when placing name labels usingthe With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above orbelow the coordinate label.

With Active Angle/Along Leader Line — Set to With Active Angle to specify thatthe label text be oriented along the active angle, or set to Along Leader Line to specifythat the text be oriented along the leader line’s last segment.

307

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Justification Options (Just) — Activates a palette of options used to set the position oftext relative to its origin.

Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode isenabled.


— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center




Text Size — The Text Size fields display the text size that is to be used with theselected label. When a label is selected, the text size fields are automatically populatedwith the values that are to be used for that label. If the text size is read from the LabelDescription Library or from the Type 63 data, the Text Size fields are read-only. If theText Size fields are populated with the active text size, the fields can be edited.

Active Angle — Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Setthe With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.

308

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Labels________________ Horizontal — Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.


Coordinate Label — Disables name label options on the form.

Other — Activates a list of other types of labels that may be placed.

The following four labels (between Coordinate Label and Other) aredefined per drawing type in the lab_button.dwg file during project setup.This file resides in the project directory. A sample lab_button.dwg fileis shown below:

# This file maps the command buttons on the Label Placement# form in the Place Label Command to a Label Number in the# Label Description Library.# There are a set of special labels described below that# do not refer to a specific label number but a set of# labels.# Special Label Number# SP1, "Piping Line Number"# SP2, "Component Tag"# SP3, "Piping Reducer"# SP4, "Piping Piece Mark"

# You May define a Maximum of 4 Label Numbers per Drawing Type

# Define Drawing Type to Which Buttons Apply

# Define Label Numbers and Text for Buttons# Label Number, Text to Display on Button# (MAXIMUM of 20 Characters)

DrawingType=641 ! Plot Plans

309

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ 12, "Equipment Number"14, "Structural ID"50, "Dwg View Name"52, "Dwg View Scale"

DrawingType=643 ! Equipment Arrangement Drawings

12, "Equipment Number"6, "Nozzle Number"50, "Dwg View Name"52, "Dwg View Scale"

DrawingType=665

SP1, "Piping Line Number"5, "Instr. Tag Number"6, "Nozzle Number"12, "Equipment Number"

DrawingType=731 ! Instrument Location Plans

SP1, "Piping Line Number"5, "Instr. Tag Number"6, "Nozzle Number"12, "Equipment Number"

As shown in the sample file, the DrawingType=xxx line (where xxx isthe drawing type number found in Standard Note 2000) begins a buttondefinition for a drawing type. You may define up to 4 buttons perdrawing type by using the label type number from the Label DescriptionLibrary, followed by a comma (,), followed by the desired button text inquotes.

If a drawing type is not defined in the lab_button.dwg file, the followingdefault buttons (the SPx buttons listed in the lab_button.dwg file above)are used:

— SP1: Component Tag

— SP2: Line Number Label

— SP3: Place Flow Arrow

— SP4: Piping Piecemark

Four buttons will always be present on the form in this area. Defining fewer than 4buttons per drawing view will result in the defaults listed above being used for theunspecified buttons.

For example, defining only two buttons for a drawing type will result in the 2 user-specified buttons, plus the remaining default Place Flow Arrow and Piping Piecemarkbuttons being available on the form..

Nozzle Number — Places a nozzle number label. You will be prompted to identify thenozzle being labeled.

310

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Labels________________ Piping Line Number — Places a piping line number label. You will be prompted toidentify the line being labeled.

Equipment Number — Places an equipment number label. You will be prompted tosnap to the equipment item being labeled.

Instrument Tag Number — Places an instrument tag number label. You will beprompted to identify the instrument being labeled.

Category Type Options — Allows selection of specific label category types for label.Options include Piping/Equipment, Electrical Raceway, Structural, PLANTGEN,Miscellaneous, Drawing View, and User Input.

The types of labels listed in each option depend on settings in the LabelDescription Library in the Reference Data Manager module.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide formore information on Label Description Library and setting up labels.More information on these options can also be found at Name Label,page 346 .

Specific Labels — Allows placement of specific label types. Options include PipingLine Number, Component Tag, Piping Reducer, Piping Piecemark, Flow Arrow,Drawing View Scale, and Drawing View Name labels.

Define Active Leader Line — Defines a leader line as the leader line used when theActive Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the definedactive leader line with the label.

Move Label — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, ormove just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partialis selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if alabel consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move thename label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The defaultsetting for this toggle is Move Entire.

After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify thelabel to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associatedgraphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label(and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).

Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.

This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last labelplaced.

Move Text Only — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text,or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If MovePartial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. Thedefault setting for this toggle is Move Entire.

311

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap toidentify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move EntireLabel option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain inplace. The system puts the text only in raster drag.



Modify Label — This option provides the features of the Move Label option and theMicroStation Modify Element command. Select and place a data point or snap toidentify the label to be modified.


Snap lock and text drag modes are automatically activated with this command, and theyare restored to their previous values when exiting this command by any means. Also,this option respects the Place No Leader/Place Leader Line, Line TerminatorON/OFF, and Default/Alternate Line Style options on the basis of the label identified,regardless of the previous status of these options. These options will be restored to theirprevious settings upon the command being exited by any means.

If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existingleader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting aleader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does notinclude a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option.When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" ofthe component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for theremaining vertices of the leader line.

For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leaderline and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select.

If text drag mode is enabled, the text will be placed in drag mode for you to re-positiononce you accept the leader line. If drag mode is disabled, the location of the text for thelabel will not be revised as part of adding the leader line.

You can revise the active angle for the text or drag the identified label, leader line ortwo segments of a leader line by their vertex to the desired destination and place a datapoint. You can move the text with the label enclosure graphics, if applicable. Theleader line segment closest to the text rubber-bands, stretching until the next data pointis placed.

If you snap near a vertex, the segments joined by it are moved together to the next datapoint placed. If you snap to the text part of the label, the label is moved from thenearest vertex. If you snap to a point along a segment of a leader line, the leader line ismoved. If you snap to the leader line or the vertex of the leader line closest to the text,both the leader line and the text are moved.

312

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Labels________________ If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified willautomatically be rotated to that orientation.

This option maintains the associativity between the location of the label in the drawingand the location of the component in the model being labeled.

You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and select Accept on thedisplayed leader line.

Delete Element — Deletes entire or selected elements of name or coodinate labels.This option activates a Delete Entire / Delete Partial toggle. Set the toggle to entire orpartial, select the label to be deleted, then perform a data-button search to identify theelement to be deleted. Then, press <D> to accept the element, or press <R> to reset.


If a combination label (consisting of multiple text elements) is selected,you may delete a single text element.

This command also deletes rejection markers placed by the MassAnnotation command.

Edit Text — This option allows you to edit the part of a label that was entered directlyat placement. You will be prompted to identify the label that you wish to edit.

The Edit Text command will edit user defined text but will not resizethe label enclosure if placed with the User Input label type. If the labelis to be edited, the correct steps would be to delete the label and replaceit with the correct text. The new label enclosure will be sized correctly.The deletion step is not needed if the user defined label does not includea label enclosure.

Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information.

Add Coordinate Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify thepreviously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identifythe component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. Thesystem automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of theidentified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and thecoordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text forthe coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, anddelete operations.

Add Name Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previouslycreated label to be used for creating a name label. (Do not identify the componentbeing labeled.) Then, Accept to place the name label. The system automaticallycreates the name label and associates the two labels. Both labels can be updated byusing the Update Labels command. The text for the two labels are associated formove, modify, and delete operations.

313

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ See Name Label, page 346 for more information.

Steps

1. Select the Place Labels command from the Update Labels palette.

The system activates the Place Label form, and prompts you to select the desiredlabeling option.

2. Select the desired type of label, then select any additional options you wish to use tomodify the label being placed. For example, you may select the sequence of coordinatedisplay for coordinate labels; you can also adjust the text size, justification, andtermination options for name and coordinate labels. After selecting the desired labeland its settings, Accept the selections.

You will be prompted to identify the coordinate location or element which you wish tolabel.

3. Identify the coordinate location or element which you wish to label.

For labels which allow line terminators, you will be prompted to specify all remainingvertices for the line terminator. When all terminator vertices have been specified, youwill be prompted to accept the leader line or reset the form.

4. Specify all remaining vertices for the line terminator, then Accept the selections.

The system places the label, and prompts you to select another label to be placed.

314

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Equipment Centerlines________________

7.3 Equipment Centerlines

This command activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form, which lets you placeor revise centerline labels for equipment items in orthogonal views. This command is limitedto the labeling of parametrics only; equipment obects defined as primitives will not belabeled.

Parametrics with primitives added to them will be labeled by this command.

Centerlines will only be placed in orthogonal views. They will be placed for equipmentwhich has been rotated about one axis (or not rotated at all), but equipment which has beenrotated about two axes will not receive centerline labels.

Centerline labels behave like any other kind of labels; they have associativity with respect tothe equipment group to which they apply. This means that they respect the Update Labelscommand in the following situations:

If the equipment group is moved, the centerline will be moved when the Update Labelscommand is next used.

If the equipment group is deleted, the centerline will be deleted when the UpdateLabels command is next used.

The Update Labels command will not be respected for centerline labels in the followingsituations:

If the equipment group has been rotated since the label was placed.

315

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ If the parametric form for equipment group has been modified (after equipmentplacement).

If either of the above situations occurs after centerline label placement, you will need to deleteand replace the centerlines for the applicable equipment groups.


Before the Equipment Centerlines command can be used, the eqp_center.dwg file must beedited to control centerline placement according to your specifications.

The eqp_center.dwg file (delivered to the project directory) controls which equipment objectsreceive centerline labels. In addition to listing the objects which may be labeled with thiscommand, this file also specifies the following attributes:

Which views of the objects will be labeled.

Multiple centerlines for specified objects.

Which data points on the equipment object through which the centerline label will beplaced.

The direction of the centerline.

The length of centerline label’s extension beyond the graphical extents of the equipmentobject.

The symbology of the centerline label.

A sample eqp_center.dwg file is excerpted below:

UNIT= INCH

!Form View CL DP Annotation!No Type No No Direction Extension Category!————————————————————————–E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top

2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! sidePT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front

E210 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3

PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! sidePT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front

E215 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3

PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! sidePT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front

316

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Equipment Centerlines________________ Using the first equipment type shown as an example, each field in the file format will bedescribed.

The presence of the parametric form number of a given equipment type (form number E205 inthis example) specifies that the command will recognize all equipment objects of that type asrecipients of a centerline label.

UNIT= INCH

!Form View CL DP Annotation!No Type No No Direction Extension Category!————————————————————————–E205 ST 1 DP1 SNS 0.375 3 ! top

2 DP1 SEW 0.375 3PS 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! sidePT 1 DP1 VERT 0.375 3 ! front

Each line of the file describes how centerline labels will be placed for one view of thatequipment parametric. To place more than one centerline in that view, simply add anotherrow of keywords under the same parametric form number as shown in the example above.

The rest of the fields in the file are explained below.

Field Description

UNIT= The units of measure that will apply to the centerline extensionvalues. The possible values for this field are INCH for inches, andMM for millimeters.

Form No The equipment parametric form number from which centerlines arebeing defined. Each parametric form number in this file can receivecenterline labels. This field will be empty if this line describes thesecond (or more) centerline definition for that equipment parametricform number.

View Type The type of object view (top, side and end view) for whichcenterlines are being defined. The keywords Primary (P), Secondary(S), and Tertiary (T) describe the axis of the equipment placementorientation tee. For example, PS is the plane that includes theprimary and secondary axis of the equipment group. This field willbe empty if this line describes the second or third centerline for agiven equiupment form in a given drawing view.

CL No The number of the centerline being specified by this row of the file.The first (or only) centerline for the given view of this parametricform number is number 1, and the second centerline for that drawingview is specified by the number 2.

DP No The datum point through which the centerline will be placed. Forexample, DP1 will be the datum point 1 of equipment.

317


Direction Direction of centerline. The possible values for this field are:

PNS Plant north-south

PEW Plant east-west

SNS Site north-south

SEW Site east-west

EPT Equipment primary tee

EST Equipment secondary tee

ETT Equipment tertiary tee

HOR Horizontal

VERT Vertical

NORMAL-CLiNormal to previously defined centerline number i in thesame view type, where ’normal’ is the plane of the viewtype being defined. A dash (-) is required between theNORMAL and CLi keywords.

DPi-DPj Parallel to a vector from DPi to DPj, where the DP valuescorrespond to data points on equipment items.

Extension The default length that the centerline should extend beyond thegraphic range of the equipment being labeled.

Annotation categoryThe user-defined drawing annotation category number that applies tothe centerline graphic symbology. The User-Defined DrawingAnnotation Category Data option in the Project Data Managercommand of the Project Administrator (PD_Project) module of PDScontrols graphic symbology. The number placed in this field shouldcorrespond with the listed position of the category assigned tocenterline graphics. For example, the centerline graphic category inthe project from which the sample file was taken is the third categoryin the list of user-defined drawing annotation categories, whichmeans that it is number 3.

Any text preceded by an exclamation point (!) will not be processed by thesystem; this allows users to place comments inside the file.

318

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Equipment Centerlines________________

Commands

Place Centerlines by View — Prompts you to select the view to be processed by thecommand. Select the view, then select Accept to place centerlines for that view.

Place Centerlines by Group — Activates an Equipment Number field, which allowsyou to specify the number of the equipment upon which you wish to place centerlines.

Key in the desired equipment number or snap to the desired equipment, then selectAccept to place centerlines for the specified equipment in all drawing views.

Extend Centerline — Allows you to extend the centerlines that have been placed.After selecting this command, place a data point on the centerline that you wish toextend. Move the end of the centerline label to the desired location, then place a seconddata point to accept the new centerline extension.

Delete Centerline — Allows deletion of the existing centerlines. After selecting thiscommand, snap to the equipment containing the centerline which you wish to delete.Select Accept (or place a data point) to delete the selected centerline.

Delete Element — Allows deletion of existing label elements. After selecting thiscommand, place a data point on the label element which you wish to delete, then place asecond data point to accept deletion of that element.



Steps

1. Select the Equipment Centerlines command from the Annotation palette.

The system activates the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form and promts you toselect the drawing view for which you wish to place centerline labels. (The defaultaction for the Place/Revise Equipment Centerlines form is Place Centerlines byView.)

2. Select the view for which you wish to place centerline labels. Select Accept to placecenterlines on all equipment groups allowed in the view

— OR —

Specify the desired equipment group by using the Place Centerline by Group option,then select Accept to place centerlines on the specified equipment group.

319


3. Use the remaining commands to modify or delete existing centerline labels asnecessary.

320

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Update Labels________________

7.4 Update Labels

This command activates the Update Labels form used to update displayable attribute drawinglabels and coordinate labels to reflect changes in the model. Labels can be updated byselected view or by identifying a specific label in the view. This option is also used toreposition, modify, delete, and partially edit or completely replace user-defined labels.

This command does not delete associative name labels or coordinate labels when both of thefollowing conditions have been met:

The range of the component in the model continues to intersect the volume of thecorresponding drawing view.

The range of the name or coordinate label (including the text and the leader line)continues to intersect the space within the drawing that is enclosed by thecorresponding drawing view’s skeleton.

The Update Labels command updates name labels on the basis of the Reference Databaseunder any of the following conditions:

When changes to the applicable alphanumeric data in the model have been made.

When changes to the definition of the format for that name label type in the LabelDescription Library have been made.

When the label attributes listed in the Label Graphic Data form of the LabelDescription Library are modified. Such items include line weight, line style, color,character size, and several other label attributes.

When the definition of the label enclosure for that name label type was revised in theLabel Description Library.

When the selection of underlining for the text within that name label type has beenrevised in the Label Description Library. For instance, if the name label was created ata time when the Label Description Library specified no underlining for the label’s text,but the definition has been changed, the name label is updated. If the text for the namelabel was created with underlining and the Label Description Library has been revised,the name label is updated. In all cases when the underlining option has been enabled,the length of the underlining will be corrected when the length of text within theapplicable name label is updated.

When one of the labeled attributes (such as a coordinate) has been changed.

Equipment must be defined with a datum point for labels to update onprimitive graphics.

The Update Labels command also updates equipment centerlines placed with the EquipmentCenterlines command. It will update the centerline position if an equipment group has beenmoved or deleted. It will not update the centerlines for a group that has been rotated, or if amodification has been made to the corresponding parametric form. In either of these cases,the centerline should be deleted and replaced after the modification.

321


Selecting the Restart command near the top of the form will highlight allavailable views. Otherwise, you may select the desired view(s) from list onthe form, or you will be prompted to identify them in the drawing.

Commands

Create Revision Labels/Do NOT Create Revision Labels — Controls the creation ofrevision labels. If this option is activated, the system will maintain a copy of any nameor coordinate label that is updated or deleted. These revision labels can be displayedinside revision clouds or revision triangles on orthographic drawings.

When this option is enabled, a copy of the previous version of the name or coordinatelabel is made in the following instances:

The text for a name or coordinate label is updated in the drawing on the basis ofchanges in the database or movement of the labelled component.

A name or coordinate label is deleted in the drawing because the labelled componenthas been deleted from the model.

The label format has been changed during the project life cycle.

Update Labels cannot distinguish between a label being moved as aresult of a component being moved in the model and a label beingmoved because a drawing view was repositioned for the sake of drawingcomposition. Therefore, if you select this option after moving a drawingview, all name and coordinate labels will be copied as updated labels.

The revision labels will be identical to the drawing labels except that:

322

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Update Labels________________ The weight for a revision management label will be two (2) greater than the weight ofthe corresponding drawing label.

The color of a revision management label will be zero (typically white).

They will be assigned to the same drawing category as defined for the "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics for that drawing view. This will allow creation and deletion ofthese labels to be managed according to drawing view.

Only the label’s text will be copied as a revision management label; the leader line andany enclosures will not.

Since a drawing can have no more than 64 drawing categories, it isnecessary to share the category for the optional "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics. Because of this, users should coordinate creation anddeletion of hidden graphics with the use of revision management labels.

Axis Lock Off/On — When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock forplacement of labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing thevertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either thehorizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be lockedto a drawing axis.

Update Selected Views — Updates all the labels in the specified view.

Update Single Labels — Updates the specified drawing label(s) to reflect the currentstatus of the model.

Move Entire Label — Repositions the drawing label(s) in the drawing view, but doesnot update the text. Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label,or to move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements.

If Move Partial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved.For example, if a label consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, youmay move the name label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. Thedefault setting for this toggle is Move Entire.

Move Text Only — Repositions the drawing label text in the drawing view. Set theMove Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, or move just a singleelement of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partial is selected, onlythe text element identified by the user will be moved. The default setting for this toggleis Move Entire.



323









If the orientation of the active label is revised, subsequent labels identified willautomatically be rotated to that orientation.


You can press <R> to redefine the vertices of the leader line, and Accept the displayedleader line.


324

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Update Labels________________




Delete Revision Labels — Deletes revision management labels from all or selecteddrawing views. Place a data point on the drawing view containing revisionmanagement labels to be deleted. The selected drawing view will be highlighted. Toselect all drawing views, place a data point on each one. When the form is accepted, therevision management labels for the selected drawing view(s) will be deleted.

Although revision management labels share the drawing category with"hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics, deleting revision managementlabels will not affect the "hidden" vector-hidden-line graphics.However, re-creating vector hidden-line graphics will delete all graphicson that level, including revision management labels, for the active view.

Revise Text — Select to completely replace user-defined label text. Refer to ReviseText, page 326 for more information.

Edit Text — Select to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in the label.Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information.


Accept/Select Update Labels optionSelect the desired option from the bottom of the form.The move options are used to reposition the drawinglabel(s) in the drawing view, but do not update the text.

Snap lock mode is automatically activated with this command and the previoussnap lock mode is restored when exiting this command by any means. Thisoption provides the features of the Move Entire Label option and theMicroStation Modify Element command.

Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)Place a data point on (or snap to) the desired label.

Identify Element or Accept for Last LabelPlace a data point on the element of the label to bedeleted.

325


7.4.1 Revise Text

This option completely replaces the part of the label that is user-defined text. This option isalso used to replace text in a non-associative label which was created with the MicroStationPlace Text command. You cannot revise labels which are completely formed from attributedata or predefined text.

Steps

1. Select the Revise Text option from the Update Labels form.

2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)

Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be revised.

3. User Defined Text Label - Keyin Text

Key in the text string to replace the user-defined portion of the identified label.

If the name label being revised is associative, the system re-prompts for the text. Thesystem substitutes the entered text for the user-defined part of the label. The label isre-formed based on the attribute data and the label definition in the Label DescriptionLibrary.

An error message is displayed if the label text was created fromformatted attribute data and predefined text.

For associative name labels, this requires a change to the data structure of the label inorder to include the position and length of the user-specified text within the label.

326

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Edit Text________________

7.4.2 Edit Text

This option is used to edit partially a part of the user label. It cannot be used to edit text in anon-associative label created with the Place Text command. This command does not replaceany text formed from attribute data or predefined text.

Steps

1. Select the Edit Text option from the Update Labels form.

2. Identify Label (Data Btn or Snap)

Place a data point or snap to identify the label to be edited.

3. Keyin text to be replaced in label

Key in the text string to be replaced from the user-defined portion of the identifiedlabel.

4. Keyin replacement text

Key in the text string to replace the specified string, and select Accept to process thespecified edit.

If the name label being edited is a user-input associative label, the system prompts for asubstring to search in the label’s text and the substring with which it is to be replaced.

Only a substring of the user-defined part of the label is substituted through this option.It does not replace any text formed from attribute data or predefined in the LabelDescription Library.

For named labels, only name labels with a user-defined attribute defined as part of thelabel in the Label Description Library can be edited with this command.

You can use MicroStation commands to delete or add graphics to the label aslong as the additions are added to the label graphic group.

327


7.5 Revision Markers

This command activates the Revision Markers form, and is used to place a revision triangleor revision cloud on a drawing.


The graphic parameters for the revision triangle or revision cloud must be previously definedin the Label Description Library. Label number 205 is reserved for revision triangles.

Refer to the Create Label Graphic Data section in the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)Reference Guide to define the graphic parameters. The PDS Drawing Annotation CategoryData section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide defines the colorcodes and line weights.

Commands

Draw Revision Cloud — Defines the type of revision marker as cloud.

Draw Revision Triangle — Defines the type of revision marker as a triangle.

Move Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved.You can move a specified label or a label and any associated graphics to a new locationusing drag mode. The system highlights the identified label (and optionally allassociated graphics, such as the leader line).



328

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Revision Markers________________

Steps

1. Select the Revision Markers command.

The system activates the Revision Markers form.

2. Select Revision Option

Select the type of revision marker to be placed from the Revision Markers form. Toplace a revision triangle, go to step 3.

— OR —

To place a revision cloud, complete steps 4 through 7.

3. Specify Triangle Location

Place a data point to specify the location for the revision triangle to be placed on thedrawing view.

The system places a triangle at the specified location and places the drawing revisionnumber (retrieved from the drawing RDB) in the triangle.

4. Specify Arc Start Point

Place a data point to indicate the starting point for the first arc in the cloud.

5. Specify Arc Curvature

Place a data point to indicate a point on the arc.

6. Specify Arc End Point

Place a data point to indicate the end point for the arc.

The system displays the defined arc.

7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 to define all the arcs which form the cloud.

A revision cloud is treated as a closed element. When you snap to the initial start pointfor the end point of an arc, the placement is complete.

329


7.6 Display Report

This command activates the Display Report form. It contains a list of reports for the activeproject. You can display a report by selecting it from the list, and the report can be placed in adrawing using the Place Report in Drawing option.

Graphic parameters such as color, weight, and character size for the report canbe set in the Project Data Manager under graphic symbology data fordrawings.

Commands

Move Element — Moves a placed cell.

Delete Element — Deletes a placed cell.

Steps

1. Select the Display Report command from the panel menu.

2. The system displays the Display Report form with a list of the reports.

3. Select Report

Select the report to be displayed from the list on the Display Report form.

4. Accept or Select Other Report

Accept the highlighted report, select another report. The system displays the report onthe Display Report form.

330

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Display Report________________

You can view the displayed report by using the arrows in the center of the form to moveleft and right and the scroll bar to move up and down.

5. Select the Select Another Report option to redisplay the report list for selection anddisplay of another report.

— OR —

Select the Place Report in Drawing option from the Display Report form to place thedisplayed report in the drawing view.

6. Key in the required Max Blank Lines and Space Factor values.

When you generate a report, there can be sections with blank lines. Max Blank Lineslimits the number of blank lines to the specified value when you place the report in adrawing. Space Factor sets the spacing between the lines in the report. The defaultspacing is set in Project Administrator.

331

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Select the desired Report Position to specify the report placement parameters. Theseparameters set the justification when you place the report in a drawing.

7. Data Button will Place Report

Place a data point in the drawing view to specify the location of the report being placed.

The justification is from the data button in the view.

332

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Cell________________

7.7 Place Cell

This command is used to place user-defined cell into a drawing. The cell’s name, which doesnot display in the form, and the cell’s description needs to be defined in a DrawingAnnotation Cells List, dwg_cell_list, in the project directory. Each cell name, followed by thedescription, must be on a separate line and at least one space must separate the cell name fromthe description. The description is limited to 60 characters. Blank lines and comment linesbeginning with an exclamation point (!) in the first column may be placed anywhere in thislibrary.

Because cells placed with MicroStation do not respect the PD_Draw pre-definedcategory settings, attempting to move or delete cells placed through MicroStation maycause unpredictable results. It is recommended that all desired cells be added to thePD_Draw cell library (and added to the dwg_cell_list file) and placed through thePDS Place Cell command.

Commands

Move Element — Moves a placed cell.

Delete Element — Deletes a placed cell.

Field Descriptions

Active Scale — Key in the active scale for the cell.

Active Angle — Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle.

Horizontal — Defines the orientation for the cell as horizontal.

333

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Vertical — Defines the orientation for the cell as vertical.

Steps

1. Select the Place Cell command.

The Place User Cell form displays.

2. Select the cell to place.

3. Define the Active Scale and Active Angle if you want.

4. Place the cell in the drawing.

334

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Text and Line________________

7.8 Place Text and Line

This command is used to place user-defined text labels that are not associated with data fromthe RDB. You define the text to be displayed, as well as the following text (and line)attributes to be used for display:

Drawing category

Line Style

Line Weight

Text Height

Text Width

Text Weight

Orientation

Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project DataManager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text.Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will onlyapply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once anotherdrawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attributevalues will no longer be active.

335


Commands

Line Style — Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates agraphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and itwill replace the currently-displayed line style.

Justification Options — Activates a palette of options used to set the position of textrelative to its origin.


— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center




Horizontal/Vertical — Places the text parallel to the horizontal or vertical plane.(These options are mutually exclusive.)

Place Line Active Angle — Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the activeangle.

Place Line — Places a line with user-defined endpoints at the angle determined by theendpoints.

Place Text — Prompts for the user-defined text, then places it at the active angle at thepoint selected.

336

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Place Text and Line________________ Move Element — Allows movement of selected elements. Place a data point on theelement to be moved, then move the element to the desired location. Place a seconddata point to select the new location of the element, then hit the Reject/Reset button toaccept the new placement and finish the operation.

Delete Element — Allows deletion of selected elements. Place a data point on theelement to be deleted, then place a second data point to accept the deletion of theselected element.

Field Descriptions

Active Angle — Displays the current active angle at which the text (and line, ifapplicable) will be displayed.

Enter Text — Accepts the user-defined text that will be placed. This field will displayup to 40 characters at once, although more can be entered into the field.

Weight — Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field willallow a different value to be entered.

Text Height — Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this fieldwill allow a different value to be entered.

Text Width — Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this fieldwill allow a different value to be entered.

Text Weight — Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on thisfield will allow a different value to be entered.


Select Category Select the category to which the text and line attributeswill be assigned.

337


7.9 Overlay Drawing

This command attaches another orthographic drawing as a reference file to the active drawingto share drawing annotation between related drawings.

Only the drawing annotation categories from the overlay drawing is displayed. Categorydisplay changes made using the Drawing Categories command for the active drawing alsoupdates any overlaid drawings.

Steps

1. Select the Overlay Drawing command.

The Overlay Drawing Annotation form displays.


Select a drawing type from the list and Accept.

A list of available drawings for that drawing type displays.

338

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Overlay Drawing________________

3. Select Drawing(s) and Accept

Select the drawings to overlay and Accept.

339


7.10 Review Attribute

This command activates the Review Attribute form. It is used to display the attribute valuesof the identified piping component or segment, attribute values of the selected equipmentitem, and attribute values of the selected equipment nozzle. It displays information on theselected attribute for ModelDraft, HVAC, and raceway components. It also reviews the userdata associated with the element and the information associated with the PDS markers placedin the model.

Steps

1. Select the Review Attribute command from the Annotation palette.

The system activates the Review Attributes form.

2. Identify Element

The system displays the attribute values from the database for the selected element.


340

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Measure Distance________________

7.11 Measure Distance

This option activates the Measure Distance form, used to for measuring distances betweenany two components (piping, equipment, structural, etc.) or inquiring the location of anycomponent in terms of the project’s Plant Coordinate System.

Commands

Reference Point — Select this option to define from which point to start measuringfrom.

Keypoint Snap / Project Snap — If set to Keypoint Snap, tentative points go to thenearest element keypoint. The number of element keypoints can be changed using theky= MicroStation key-in. If set to Project Snap, tentative points connect to theelement where they are placed.

Measurement Point — Defines the point being specified as the point to measure to.

Field Descriptions

Delta Easting — Displays the easting distance between the two points.

Delta Northing — Displays the northing distance between the two points.

Delta Elevation — Displays the elevation distance between the two points.

Absolute — Displays the actual distance between the two points.

341


Steps

1. Select the Measure Distance command from the bar menu.

The Measure Distance form displays.

2. Define the Keypoint Snap / Project Snap toggle.

3. Specify Reference Point or Select Other Option

Identify the point to measure from.

The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the reference point displays in theleft message field.

4. Enter Measurement Point or Select Other Option

Identify the point to measure to.

The Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates of the measurement point displays inthe right message field. The distance between the two points displays.

342

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Drawing Annotation Symbology________________

7.12 Drawing AnnotationSymbology

This option activates the Drawing Annotation Symbology form. It is used to update theactive line weight, symbology, color, and text size values by selecting from the displayed list.This command can be used to more easily control the graphic parameter setup prior to thecreation of miscellaneous drawing annotation using MicroStation placement commands.

You can use Project Manager to specify the named category and the associated graphicparameters (including line terminator, text font, and text line spacing) in the ReferenceDatabase.

Until the default values for these attributes have been set in Project DataManager, the weight value for lines and other graphics will be applied to text.Remember that changes made to the text and line attribute values will onlyapply for text and lines placed immediate following the change. Once anotherdrawing category is selected, any changes made to the text and line attributevalues will no longer be active.

Commands



343


— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center




Line Style — Determines the active line style. If selected, this option activates agraphic display of line styles for you to select from. Select the desired line style, and itwill replace the currently-displayed line style.

Field Descriptions

Weight — Displays the current line weight value. Placing a data point on this field willallow a different value to be entered.

Text Height — Displays the current text height value. Placing a data point on this fieldwill allow a different value to be entered.

Text Width — Displays the current text width value. Placing a data point on this fieldwill allow a different value to be entered.

Text Weight — Displays the current text weight value. Placing a data point on thisfield will allow a different value to be entered.

344

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Drawing Annotation Symbology________________

Steps

1. Select the Drawing Annotation Symbology command from the bar menu.

The system displays the Drawing Annotation Symbology form with a list of thepredefined drawing annotation categories.

2. Select Category

Select a category to use.

The system displays the message Active Placement Data Updated.

3. Define any overrides values you want to use.

4. Select Cancel to exit the form, or select and accept another drawing annotationcategory to be updated.

345


7.13 Name Label

This command activates the Name Label form, and is used to place annotation graphics, text,and labels on the drawing.

The list of name labels available for placement can be restricted on the basis ofdrawing type. This is done in Project Setup; refer to this section found laterin the document for more information.

The Project Data Manager module controls whether or not the Leader LineON/OFF and Line Terminator ON/OFF options are available for use. Formore information, refer to Project Data Manager.

The graphics for the name label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDSDrawing category of name labels. The graphic parameters and label text contents for the labeltype are defined in the Label Description Library. Refer to the PDS Piping ReferenceDatabase User’s Guide for more information on category assignments and label descriptions.The system places name labels in a drawing with capitalized text regardless of how the data isstored.

Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed indegrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. Thisformat is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project DataManager.

346

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________

Mechanics

Placing Name Labels in Circular Enclosures

When placing name labels with circles, make sure the text height is small enough to fit insideof the circle. The circle does not open if the text height is too large.

The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a circle or a circle witha bisector:

You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the LabelDescription Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameteris undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.

If the label’s text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined forthat label, the label’s text is center-justified in circle.

If the label’s text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circledefined for that label, the label’s text is placed left-justified with respect to the circleand the right side of the circle is opened for the text.

If the label’s text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The text thatprecedes the dash will be placed above the bisector, and the text that follows the dashwill be placed below the bisector. The dash itself is not included within the label.

A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not thelabel’s text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using theMiscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator).The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label.("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number ofcharacters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager,the default extension of .25 times the average text width.

Placing Name Labels in RectangularEnclosures

The following rules apply to any labels specified to be enclosed within a rectangle:

The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the label’s text for thatspecific label - not the maximum length of the label’s text, as defined in the LabelDescription Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width unless a user-defined extension is used.

The label’s text is left-justified for multi-line labels.

A user-defined extension to the text length can be used to determine whether or not thelabel’s text fits within the circular enclosure. This extension is specified using theMiscellaneous Label Data form in Project Data Manager (Project Administrator).

347

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The extension is specified as a scale factor of the average text width of the label.("Average text width" is defined as the actual text length divided by the number ofcharacters comprising the text.) If no extension is specified in Project Data Manager,the default extension of .25 times the average text width.

Placing Name Labels to Identify EquipmentGroups

When you want to place a name label on an equipment group that is a parametric shape(defined through Equipment Eden), snap to an element within the parametric shape. Theassociative linkage, which uniquely identifies the parametric shape within the equipmentgroup, and the key point that identifies that element will be used to associate (and update) thelabel with the equipment group.

If the Equipment Eden definition for a parametric shape is modified after alabel has been associated with it, the associativity between the element and thelabel may be lost. In this case, you will need to delete the label and place anew one.

If the parametric shape is deleted and replaced, a new associative linkage willbe assigned, and subsequent use of Update Labels will automatically deletethe label.

This feature has no effect on labels associated with nozzles, since nozzles have well-definedconnect points.

If the equipment group was placed using primitive shapes, the gruop will have no associativelinkage, and you must associate the label with the equipment group’s attribute linkage byplacing a data point on the appropriate element. Therefore, it is recommended that you createequipment groups using Equipment Eden as much as possible.

348

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________

Commands

System label selection: — Select Component Tag, Piping Line Number, PipingPiecemark, or Piping Reducer to label a specific item within a drawing view.

Drawing View Scale — Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawingview scale.

Drawing View Name — Select to place a displayable attribute label for the drawingview name.

You can specify the drawing view for which the drawing view scale or name labelapplies by snapping to the outline graphics for the drawing view or by identifying adesign element in the drawing view. Unless specifically notified (by a message), theselabels can all be updated with the Update Labels command.

User label selection —

Select the Drawing View option or one of the four discipline (Piping/Equipment,Structural, PLANTGEN, Electrical Raceway) options, and specify the type of labelfrom a display list associated with the selected option to place user-defined labels.

Select Miscellaneous to place labels from the Miscellaneous list defined in the LabelDescription Library of Reference Data Manager (PD_Data). Refer to the descriptionof the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide formore information on creating labels with user-specified text.

Select User Input to place a label with text to be specified as the label is created.Select the label from the display list and key in the text string, which remains activeuntil you select a different label type or select the Restart button. To key in a two linelabel, key in a backslash "\" in the text string where you want the second line to start.This user-specified text is respected by the Update Labels command. Refer to thedescription of the Label Description Library in the Reference Data Manager ReferenceGuide for more information on creating labels with user-specified text.

Text Drag Off/On — Defines if the name label text is placed using drag mode or not.After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in drag mode.Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of the draggedtext, select Accept from the pocket menu.

349


Place No Leader/Place Leader Line — Defines if the label is placed with a leader lineor not. When no leader line is placed, and the drag mode is enabled, the text for thelabel will be formed and displayed in drag mode. You may then use the data button, orsnap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify the desired location of the label.You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.

Def Line Style / Alt Line Style — Set to designate use of the default or alternate linestyle. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. Thecenterline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this valuedifferently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.

Line Term Off/On — Defines if the leader line terminator displays or not.

Once the label is placed in the drawing, both the Place No Leader/PlaceLeader Line and the Line Term Off/On options remains in effect until youdo one of the following:

Change the option for either the leader line or the line terminator.

Select a different label type.

Select an option that results in a different list of label types beingdisplayed.

Select the Restart button.

Exit the command.

Select one of the following options within the Place Name Labelcommand:

— Define Active Leader Line

— Move Label

— Move Text Only

350

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________

— Modify Label

— Delete Element

— Place Flow Arrow

— Add Coordinate Label

Axis Lock Off/On — When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock forplacement of name labels in a drawing. You can toggle this axis lock while placing thevertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can be locked to either thehorizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segment may not be lockedto a drawing axis.



Name Label Only/With Coordinate Label — Toggle to place a name label only, or toplace a name label and a coordinate label as one operation. Following the placement ofthe name label the system activates the Coordinate Label form. Refer to CoordinateLabel, page 358. Both the name label and the coordinate label created with thiscommand can be updated using the Update Labels command.


The text representing the coordinate label is created on the MicroStation levelassociated with the drawing category for coordinate labels. The textrepresenting the name label and the remaining graphics are created on theMicroStation level associated with the drawing category for name labels.

Add Label Below/Add Label Above — Toggle used when placing name labels usingthe With Coordinate Label option to specify whether the coordinate label is placedabove or below the name label.


Coordinate Label — Activates the Coordinate Label form. This form allows you toplace coordinate labels. Refer to Coordinate Label, page 358 for more information.

351

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Justification Options (Just) — Activates a palette of options used to set the position oftext relative to its origin.


— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center





Active Angle: — Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle.Set the With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.

Horizontal — Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.


352

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________ Define Active Leader Line — Defines a leader line as the leader line used when theActive Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the definedactive leader line with the label.

Move Label — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, ormove just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partialis selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if alabel consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move thename label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The defaultsetting for this toggle is Move Entire.

After setting the toggle to the desired position, place a data point or snap to identify thelabel to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and any associatedgraphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights the identified label(and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).



Move Text Only — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire text,or move just a single text element of a label which has multiple text elements. If MovePartial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. Thedefault setting for this toggle is Move Entire.

After setting the toggle to the desired position, select and place a data point or snap toidentify the text label to be moved. This option works the same as the Move EntireLabel option except that only the label is moved, and the leader line graphics remain inplace. The system puts the text only in raster drag.






353

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ If a label was placed with a leader line or a line terminator, you can delete the existingleader line or terminator by disabling the appropriate option. By default, deleting aleader line will automatically delete its terminator, if one exists. If the label does notinclude a leader line, you can place one by enabling the Place Leader Line option.When placing a leader line, the first point for the leader line will be the "key point" ofthe component used in initially creating the label. You will be prompted for theremaining vertices of the leader line.











Place Flow Arrow — Select and place a data point to identify the pipe to be labeledwith a flow direction arrow. Then press <D> to accept the highlighted pipe. You canplace a flow arrow (including bi-directional flow arrows, where applicable) in anydrawing view if flow for the drawing was defined in the design file. If flow has notbeen defined for the specified pipe, a message is displayed informing you that the flow

354

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________ direction is undefined. Place a data point to specify the origin for the flow arrowsymbol.

Add Coordinate Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify thepreviously created name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identifythe component being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. Thesystem automatically creates the coordinate label relative to the witness line of theidentified name label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and thecoordinate label can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text forthe coordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, anddelete operations.

This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.

The flow arrow symbol must be defined in active cell library for the drawingas in the delivered cell library.

The system projects this point to the centerline of the pipe and places the flow arrow.Flow arrows can also be placed during automatic label placement.

If drag mode is enabled, the flow arrow will be oriented in drag mode on the basis ofthe direction of flow in the model and the drawing view’s orientation.

Edit Text — Select this option to partially edit that part of the user-defined text in thelabel. Refer to Edit Text, page 327 for more information.

Add Name Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify the previouslycreated coordinate label to be used for adding a name label. (Do not identify thecomponent being labeled.) Then, Accept to place the specified name label. The systemautomatically creates the name label relative to the witness line of the identifiedcoordinate label and associates the two labels. Both the name label and the coordinatelabel can be updated by using the Update Labels command. The text for thecoordinate label and the text for the name label are associated for move, modify, anddelete operations.

This command allows you to select Accept to identify the last label placed.

355


Steps

At any point in the operation of this command, you can set the character size or define thelabel orientation.

1. Select the Name Label command.

The system activates the Name Label form.

2. Select the desired label option to be used to place name labels from the Name Labelform.

3. Identify Component

Place a data point to identify the item to be labeled such as a pipe, component, pipingline, or drawing view border for view scale or name labels.

4. Accept/Reject

Press <D> to accept the highlighted item, or press <R> to reject the item and makeanother selection.

5. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.

6. To place element labels and miscellaneous annotation labels, continue with Step 7 toidentify the vertices of the leader line.

— OR —

Go to Step 9 to place drawing view and drawing scale labels.

7. Enter Data Pt 2

Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running fromthe identified component to the label location. The leader line rubber-bands, followingyou to the next data point.

You can press <R> to back up and replace the previous vertex. (For example, the firstdata point defaults to the location point identified in Step 4, so the first prompt asks fordata point 2. If you press <R> the system prompts for data point 1 enabling you tospecify the starting vertex of the leader line.)

8. Accept Leader Line or Reset

Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location.(For example, if Accept is used when only one vertex of the leader line has beendefined, the active label orientation is used to place the label with no leader line. Whenno leader line is present, you can place the label in drag mode.)

356

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Name Label________________

Some labels are defined in the label description library to have no leaderlines. For these labels the system only prompts for the location of thetext.

An example of element labels placed using a leader line to set the label location isshown below.

9. Enter Label Location

Place a data point in the view to identify the location of the drawing view name,drawing scale label, or other label.

10. Select the desired option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add ordelete name labels placed in the drawing view(s).

357


7.14 Coordinate Label

This command activates the Coordinate Label form. It is used to label the coordinates at aspecified location, to select the coordinate values to be labeled, and to specify the form of thecoordinate label. These options may require frequent changes depending on the density andconfiguration of data within the area being labeled.

Most coordinate labels can be updated to reflect changes in the model, or to be realigned witha drawing view which was modified. Refer to Update Labels, page 321 for more information.However, coordinate labels placed in non-PDS models are non-associative. A warning isdisplayed indicating that the coordinate label will not be moved, updated, or deletedautomatically by the Update Labels command on the basis of any changes to thecorresponding non-PDS model.

Since the coordinate value(s) to be labeled reflect the active PDS Coordinate System, thegraphics for the coordinate label are placed on the MicroStation level associated with the PDSDrawing category for coordinate labels. Refer to the Project Data Manager section in the PDProject Administrator Reference Guide for more information on category assignments andlabel descriptions.

Until you revise the default values in Project Data Manager, the Coordinate Label commanduses the following symbology options:

The default line style of coordinate label witness lines is solid (0).

The alternate (centerline) line style for coordinate label witness lines is dashed (4).

Any coordinate label with no prefix or suffix defined will be displayed with the textheight and width for coordinate labels without supplementary text.

Any coordinate label with a prefix or suffix defined will be displayed using the textwidth, height, and weight determined by the prefix/suffix supplementary text option.

There will be two spaces between the prefix or suffix and the coordinate value. Anyleading or trailing blanks defined in the prefix or suffix will be automatically removedprior to forming the coordinate label.

The line spacing for labels with multiple lines is determined from the RDB data for thedrawing. For previously-created drawings, the default is the present function of text height.Placement of a coordinate label without a leader line is based on the active MicroStationtext/text node justification.

358

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Coordinate Label________________

Commands

Label Only — Places the label only (no leader lines). When using this command andthe drag mode, the text for the label will be formed and displayed in drag mode. Youmay then use the data button, or snap to existing graphics in the drawing to specify thedesired location of the label. You can cancel the label placement with the reset button.(Coordinate label justification settings will be ignored when drag mode is enabled.)



Below - Places the label’s text below the leader line.


[On] - Places the label’s text on the leader line, and between brackets.


359

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Coordinate Sequence — Displays the current sequence in which coordinate valueswill be defined. The default sequence is Easting, Northing, Elevation. To change thissequence, place a data point in this field; this activates a list of possible sequences foryou to choose from.

Select the desired sequence by placing a data point on it. Any coordinate labels createdprior to this enhancement will be considered by the Update Labels command to havebeen defined as Easting, Northing, Elevation.

Supplementary Text Options — You can specify that the coordinate label be createdwith supplementary text. This text supplements the basic coordinate label, whichconsists of the coordinate value, the coordinate axis short description, and thecoordinate system short description. The supplementary text can be placed as a prefixor suffix.

Supplementary text may be edited or added in the drawing’s seed data (Type 63)through the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator. Refer to the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information regarding supplementary text.

Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list ofspecial text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the systemprompts for the text.

The prefix and suffix text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project DataManager section in the PD Project Administrator Reference Guide for information ondefining these values. Some of these options are only valid when labeling a specificcoordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe and Elevation.

Bottom of Pipe — If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevationcoordinate, the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labelsto have the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activated whenselected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.

Face of Flange — If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the boltedend of a piping item which is used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-halfgasket separation. For equipment nozzles, the datum point location is at the face-of-flange so it is not necessary to compensate for gasket separation. This commandverifies that you have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, aninstrument component, or a nozzle.

360

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Coordinate Label________________ Top of Steel — If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highestelevation of the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

You may place a top-of-steel coordinate label using sparse model graphics. If you doso, you must snap to a structural member for which the center line represents top-of-steel.

Top of Concrete — If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is thehighest elevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Top of Platform — If you select Top of Platform, the coordinate value labeled is theelevation of the plane of the platform on which the grating or checkered plate issupported.

If a structural model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following ruleswill apply:

The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the structural component, ratherthan the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will be displayed if ahorizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.

Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or theplatform which it describes.

If an equipment model is identified in conjunction with this feature, the following ruleswill apply:

The elevation option for the coordinates will be automatically enabled.

The coordinate labeled will be the highest elevation of the equipment’s parametricshape, rather than the elevation of the graphic selected. An error message will bedisplayed if a horizontal component is not identified in conjunction with this feature.

Update Labels will respect any changes made to the drawing view definition or theplatform which it describes

Bottom of Duct — If you select Bottom of Duct, the coordinate value labeled is thelowest elevation of the HVAC duct rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

Text Drag Off/On — Defines if the coordinate label text is placed using drag mode ornot. After the leader line is placed, the text and any label enclosure is placed in dragmode. Moving the text does not affect the leader line. To accept the placement of thedragged text, select Accept from the pocket menu.

Def Line Style / Alt Line Style — Set to designate use of the default or alternate linestyle. The values for these line styles are defined in Project Data Manager. Thecenterline style will be used as the alternate line style until you define this valuedifferently on the basis of label type in Project Data Manager.

Line Term Off/On — Set to determine whether or not the witness line for a coordinatelabel has a line terminator.

361


The line terminator specified in the RDB for coordinate labels is used if theline terminator is on. If you choose a witness line without a line terminator, agap is left between the location being labeled and the end of the witness line.The plot size of the gap is defined in the RDB.

Axis Lock On/Off — When this lock is on, it provides a flat 3-D axis lock forplacement of coordinate labels with as many as four vertices. You can toggle this axislock while placing the vertices of the leader line. In other words, one segment can belocked to either the horizontal or vertical axis of the drawing, whereas another segmentmay not be locked to a drawing axis.

Activation of the axis lock limits you to a leader line with only two vertices, anddeactivation enables you to place a leader line with as may as four vertices.



Coordinate Only/With Name Label — Toggle to create a coordinate label only, orcreate a coordinate label and a name label as one operation. Following the placement ofthe coordinate label, the system activates the Name Label form. See Name Label, page346 for more information. Both the coordinate label and the name label created withthis command can be updated using the Update Labels commands.


The text representing the name label is created on the MicroStation levelassociated with the drawing category for name labels. The text representingthe name coordinate and the remaining graphics are created on theMicroStation level associated with the drawing category for coordinate labels.

Add Label Below/Add Label Above — Toggle used when placing name labels usingthe With Name Label option to specify whether the name label is placed above orbelow the coordinate label.


Name Label — Activates the Name Label form. This form allows you to place namelabels. Refer to Name Label, page 346 for more information.


362

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Coordinate Label________________


— L = left

— R = right

— T = top

— B = bottom

— C = center





Active Angle: — Key in the angle value in degrees to set a specific rotation angle. Setthe With Active Angle/Along Leader Line toggle to With Active Angle.

Horizontal — Defines the orientation for the active label as horizontal.


Define Active Leader Line — Defines a leader line as the leader line used when theActive Leader Line toggle is set to On, the system automatically places the definedactive leader line with the label.

363

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Move Label — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label, ormove just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If Move Partialis selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. For example, if alabel consists of at least one coordinate value and a name label, you may move thename label, and leave the coordinate value(s) in the current position. The defaultsetting for this toggle is Move Entire.

After setting the toggle to the desired setting, select and place a data point or snap toidentify the label to be moved. You can move a specified label or a label and anyassociated graphics to a new location using drag mode. The system highlights theidentified label (and optionally all associated graphics, such as the leader line).



Move Text Only — Set the Move Entire/Partial toggle to move either the entire label,or move just a single element of a label which has multiple text elements. If MovePartial is selected, only the text element identified by the user will be moved. Thedefault setting for this toggle is Move Entire.

Select and place a data point or snap to identify the label to be moved. This optionworks the same as the Move Label option except that only the label is moved, and theleader line graphics remain in place. The system puts the text only in raster drag.







364

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Coordinate Label________________ For "combination" labels that contain a coordinate label and a name label, the leaderline and terminator will assume the symbology associated with the label you select.











Add Coord Label — Select and place a data point or snap to identify a previouslycreated name label to be used for adding a coordinate label. (Do not identify thecomponent being labeled.) Then, place a data point to specify the label location. Thesystem places the coordinate label relative to the witness line of the identified namelabel and associates the two labels.

Both the name label and the coordinate label can be updated by using theUpdate Labels command. The text for the coordinate label and the text forthe name label are associated for move, modify, and delete operations.

365


Steps

At any point during the operation of this command you can set the character size or define thelabel orientation. The line spacing for the labels is 0.25 times the active character size. Youcan select RESET at any time to identify another item or select another label type.

1. Select the Coordinate Label command.

The system activates the Coordinate Label form.

2. Select the desired coordinate Label Graphics option to specify the placement locationon the leader line for the coordinates.

The active option is highlighted.

3. Select one of the Supplementary Text Options.

4. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, or Elevation) to activate a display list ofspecial text options. If you select one of the Prefix or Suffix options, the systemprompts for the text.

5. Select from the display list to specify the supplementary text to be added to thecoordinate label.

— OR —

Select the text block, and key in the desired supplementary text.

These special text options are defined in the RDB. Refer to the Project DataManager section in the PDS Project Administrator Reference Guide forinformation on defining these values. Some of these options are only validwhen labeling a specific coordinate value, such as Bottom of Pipe andElevation.

If you select Bottom Of Pipe as the prefix or suffix for an elevation coordinate,the system indicates that this option is active and forces all coordinate labels tohave the elevation of the Bottom of Pipe. This option can only be activatedwhen selected in conjunction with the Prefix or Suffix for elevation.

If you select Face of Flange, the connect point location at the bolted end whichis used for the coordinate readout is adjusted by one-half gasket separation. Forbolted nozzles, the connect point location is at the face-of-flange so it is notnecessary to compensate for gasket separation. This command verifies thatyou have selected a bolted end of a piping component, a pipe, an instrumentcomponent, or a nozzle.

If you select Top of Steel, the coordinate value labeled is the highest elevationof the structural member rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

366

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Coordinate Label________________ If you select Top of Concrete, the coordinate value labeled is the highestelevation of the concrete rather than the elevation of the identified graphic.

1. Toggle the appropriate lock option to on or off as desired.

2. Select the coordinate (Easting, Northing, Elevation) corresponding to the type ofcoordinate label to be placed from the bottom of the form. You can select anycombination of coordinates.

The active coordinate label is displayed in the message area.

3. Identify Coordinate Location

Place a data point over an element or snap to a keypoint to identify the label location.

4. Accept/Reject

Press <D> to accept the highlighted element, or press <R> to reject and make anotherselection.

5. Enter Data Pt 2

Place a series of data points to identify the vertices of the reference line running fromthe coordinate location to the label location. You can press <R> to back up and replacethe previous vertex. The leader line rubber-bands, stretching with you until the next datapoint is placed.

6. Accept Leader Line or Reset

Select Accept at any point to complete the reference line and set the label location.

For the Label Only graphics option, the system only prompts for thelocation of the text.

The system places the label at the specified location.

367

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Examples of coordinate labels placed with and without supplementary text:

7. Select an option from the bottom of the form to manipulate, modify, add or deletecoordinate labels placed in the drawing view(s).

The system highlights the identified label (and optionally all associated graphics, suchas the leader line).

8. Place a second data point to place the label at the new location.

368

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Automatic Labels________________

7.15 Automatic Labels

This option selects label(s) to be placed automatically in one or more drawing views. It canalso be used to label the contents of a fence and to define component search criteria toautomatically label only certain elements.

The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a circle or a circle with abisector line as the label enclosure.

You specify the circle diameter in absolute terms, for example 1/2", in the LabelDescription Library Manager when the label is created or revised. If the circle diameteris undefined, the circle is created in the same manner as the current practice.

If the label’s text does not include a dash and the text fits within the circle defined forthat label, the label’s text is placed center-justified with respect to the center of thecircle.

If the label’s text does not include a dash but the text does not fit within the circledefined for that label, the label’s text is placed left-justified with respect to the circleand the right side of the circle is opened for the text.

If the label’s text includes a dash, the text is broken into two lines. The top line is thetext that precedes the dash and the lower line is the text that follows the dash. The dashitself is not included within the label.

In determining whether or not the text fits within the circle, .25 times the text width is addedto the length.

The following rules apply to any labels specified to a include a rectangle as the labelenclosured.

The length of the rectangle is determined by the actual length of the label’s text for thatspecific label - not the maximum length of the label’s text, as defined in the LabelDescription Library. This length is padded by .25 times the text width.

The label’s text is left-justified for multi-line labels.

Labels can include an angle such as the bend angle of a piping component to be displayed indegrees and minutes, including any decimal attributes, on the basis of the angular format. Thisformat is specified on the Angular/Slope Label/Readout form in the Project DataManager.

369


Commands

Active Leader Line Off/On — Set to On to place the leader line defined with theDefine Active Leader Line option on either the Coordinate Labels form or the NameLabels form. Set to Off to use the leader line defined in the label description library forthe selected label.

Search Crit Off/On — Set on to use a specific search criteria defined with the DefineSearch Criteria option which restricts the elements to be automatically labeled basedon database attributes.

Label Fence Contents — Places a fence and labels the items inside the fence. TheLabel Fence Contents command is discussed in the next section.

Define Component Search Criteria — Initiates a search for specific components,and labels those that are found. The Define Search Criteria command is discussed inSearch Criteria - Component Form, page 158 .

Orient Active Label — Specifies the angle at which the label will be placed. You mayselect Horizontal, Vertical, or key in the angle.


Select Drawing View and/or Label TypeSelect the drawing view(s) to be labeled from theDrawing Views list at the top of the form, then selectthe label type(s) to be placed from the Label Types list.Select Accept to process the request. The system placesthe specified label(s) at a location near the low or highrange of the labeled item and displays the messageAutomated Label Placement Complete.

370

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Automatic Labels________________

You can use the Move Label or Modify Label option in the Update Labels,Name Labels or Coordinate Labels commands to move the labels afterplacement.

371


7.15.1 Label Fence Contents

This option is used to define a specific portion of a drawing by placing a fence toautomatically label the fence contents. The depth of the fence is controlled by the depth of thedrawing view. You can annotate groups of components that require similar label types andleader line configurations.

Steps

1. Select the Label Fence Contents from the Automatic Labels form.

2. Identify First Fence Point

Place a data point to identify the starting location of the area to be fenced for labeling.

3. Identify Second Fence Point

Place another data point in the opposite corner to complete the fence.

4. Select Drawing View and/or Label Type

Place a data point to select the label type to be placed, and select Accept.

The system automatically places the selected label within the fenced area, and displaysthe message Automated Label Placement Complete.

372

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n


7.15.2 Search Criteria - Component Form

When you choose Component Search Criteria from the Discrimination Data Creationform or from the Discrimination Data Revision form, the Search Criteria - Componentform is displayed.

This form specifies which component attributes are restricted for the report. The default is nosearch criteria (that is, no restrictions — all component attributes are reported). The mostcommonly reported component attributes are available as form options, but you are notrestricted to those options. To display additional attributes, grouped by entity, click Other.

373


Define all the common search criteria such as Commodity Code andFabrication Category before selecting the Other option. Once the Otheroption is selected, the search criteria should be defined separately for eachcategory, such as Piping Component, Instrument Component,Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support.



When you select an entity grouping that includes the attribute you want to restrict, a list ofassociated attributes is displayed.

374

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n


When you select a code-listed attribute, the Review Standard Notes form isdisplayed. This form provides a list of valid codes for the specified attribute.Simply select a code from the list and click Accept to continue with thespecification.


The search criteria defined through the Piping Component, InstrumentComponent, Piping/Tubing and Pipe Support buttons will not be displayedas a single list. To see the search criteria defined through these buttons, selectthe appropriate button.

Fields and Options

Component — Displays the restricted component attributes once they have beendefined.

Commodity Name — Restricts the reported components by means of the commodityname attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value to complete thespecification.

Commodity Code — Restricts the reported components by means of the commoditycode attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete the specification.

Fabrication Category — Restricts the reported components by means of thefrabrication category attribute. Select an operator and a code list value to complete thespecification.

Component Group Number — Restricts the reported components by means of thecomponent group number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value tocomplete the specification.

Tag/Component Number — Restricts the reported components by means of thetag/component number attribute. Select an operator and key in an attribute value tocomplete the specification.

375

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Other — Displays the entity options.

Piping Component — Restricts the reported components by means of any of theattributes that are associated with piping components. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Instrument Component — Restricts the reported components by means of any of theattributes that are associated with instruments components. From the displayed list,select an attribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or selecta code list value to complete the specification.

Piping/Tubing — Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributesthat are associated with piping or tubing components. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Pipe Support — Restricts the reported components by means of any of the attributesthat are associated with pipe support attributes. From the displayed list, select anattribute. Then select an operator and either key in an attribute value or select a codelist value to complete the specification.

Clear ALL Component Search Criteria — Deletes the restricted componentattributes once they have been defined.

Insert Search Definition — Displays the And and Or options to add search criteria tothe specification.



Operating Sequence

1. Select Component Search Criteria.

The Search Criteria - Component form is displayed.

2. Select Attribute



3. Select Operator

376

7.Draw

ing

A

nn

otatio

n

Search Criteria - Component Form________________ Select an operator from the displayed options.



377


378

8. Up

date

An

no

tation

L

abels

Update Annotation Labels________________

8. Update Annotation Labels

This command is very similar to the Update Labels command that is available in the graphicsenvironment of Drawing Manager (PD_Draw). Update Annotation Labels uses the samerules to update labels that are used in the Update Labels command. Refer to Update Labels,page 321 for more details.

Selecting this command activates the Update Annotation Labels form, which prompts you toselect the drawing type for which you wish to update annotation labels.

Selecting and accepting a drawing type from this list activates the list of available drawings ofthe selected drawing type.

379


Selecting and accepting a drawing from the list activates the Update AnnotationLabels job submission form. The Update Annotation Labels activity may besubmitted immeditately, or you may delay submission until a specified day and time.To submit the job immediately, leave the toggle in its default position: SubmitImmediately. To specify a delayed submisison, switch the toggle to its Submissionis Delayed setting, and specify the desired day and time.

When the batch job is processed, it will create three log files in the temp directory:

udl_log.<drawing type number> contains the environment variables set for thebatch process

dlupdate.<drawing type number> contains the report of which drawings wereupdated and which were not

dlquelog.<drawing type number> contains messages for any errors that mayhave been encountered while processing the drawings being updated

The file extension for each of these log files is the code-listed drawing type value forthe drawing view being processed. For example, the log file extension for filesassociated with the drawing type delivered as Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sectionsand Details would be 665, as that drawing type is number 665 in Standard Note2000 (Drawing Type).

380

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Vector Hidden Line Manager________________

9. Vector Hidden Line Manager

This command activates the Vector Hidden Line Manager form. It is used to createhidden-line-removed graphics for a specified drawing. The graphics can be created withvisible lines only, or you can create the graphics with both visible and hidden lines. There isalso an option for including or removing reference models. Optional queues, besides thedefault queue, can be created and defined. Refer to the Queue Setup section for moreinformation.

First, the system displays the List of Drawing Types and prompts you to select a drawingtype. Once a drawing type is selected and confirmed, the system prompts you to select adrawing from the List of Drawings.

When the drawing is selected and confirmed, the system activates the main Vector HiddenLine Manager form.

In order to ensure predictable results, Vector Hidden Line Manager should be runonly when referenced models are not being revised, unless the pre-processor option tocopy referenced models to a temporary working directory is used. More informationabout this pre-processing option is available in the next section.

381


Before Using This Command

Pre-processing and Post-processing Options

VHL provides some pre-processing and post-processing options which can allow you tocustomize your workflow. To use these options, you must modify your pds.cmd file so that itexports a variable called VHL_PPOPS.

Pre-processing Option

The pre-processing option, if used, forces VHL to copy reference model files into a temporaryworking directory before processing begins. This will prevent unpredictable results that couldbe obtained by running VHL on model files that were being modified during processing.

To set up this option, you must export the VHL_PPOPS variable with a keyword thatspecifies the working directory that will be used to store the reference model files beingprocessed. You can specify the desired working directory explicitly, or you can assign thesystem’s temp directory to be the working directory.

Refer to the examples below on how to specify the working directory:

$ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’}=’temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path’;

In this case, temp lets the system know that the specified path is to be used as theworking directory.

$ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’}=’temp:drive:\explicit\directory\path savetemp’;

The addition of the savetemp variable will cause the system to retain files in thespecified directory instead of automatically deleting them upon completion of theprocess. This command can be useful for troubleshooting purposes.

EXAMPLE: $ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’}=’temp:c:\vhlfiles savetemp’;

— Save and maintain copies of all reference files used when VHL is run on a drawingin the c:\vhlfiles directory.

In either case, the system creates a subdirectory under the specified temporary directory tostore the copied files. This directory will be named vhltmpaa, where aa is varied to creat aunique subdirectory. For instance, if the vhltmpaa, vhltmpab, and vhltmpac directories exist,the next subdirectory to be created would be named vhltmpad.

Post-processing Options

Post-processor options are activated by exporting the VHL_PPOPS variable with any of thefollowing keywords:

arc

382

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Vector Hidden Line Manager________________ Forces the system to recreate arcs out of VHL-stroked circular elements.

backp

Removes the backplane (the invisible back face of a drawn object) and edges parallel tothe viewing direction. If this option is not used, VHL retains edges from these faceseven though they are overlaid by identical edges originating from a matching front face.For example, if you run VHL with backp enabled, on a view where you are viewing apipe "end on" so it looks like a circle) the graphics for the inside edge (the other end ofthe pipe) will not show when moving or deleting the circle that represents the pipe inthe VHL graphics.

cell

Regroups all elements that came from one original outermost element (type 2, 18, 19,23, and so forth) so that they fall under one cell header. If the original element was asimple unnested element that was processed into several pieces, they will also begrouped under a cell header.

This is useful if you intend to edit VHL graphics after the process has been completed.All PDS-placed EDEN components are drawn "on the fly" based on line information.The last step EDEN takes prior to placing the component in the model file is to makethe graphical item a cell. When VHL is run, it breaks the cells down into simplegeometries for processing. If the cell option is not used, the final output is the sameelements that VHL processed. If the option is used, items that were cells are againmade into cells. For instance, if a gate valve is processed by VHL without the celloption, the valve will be made up of various line elements. If you try to move, copy, orin any way modify the "valve," you will only get it one piece at a time, such as thevalve operator stem. If the cell option were used, the valve could be manipulated as oneitem.

Cells are named according to the following sequence:

V0001HV0002HV0003H:V0009HV000AHV000BHV000CH:VZZZZH

To avoid naming conflicts, previously existing VHL cells (recognized by the V and Hterminators) are named according to the same convention.

join

Attempts successive processing iterations (passes) to join fragmented line strings andarcs. The number of passes is dependent on the VHL resolution. (A resolution of 1000in PD_Draw results in one processing pass.)

383

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ min:X

Eliminates any line string with a total viewplane-projected length (in UORs) less thanthe value of X, where X is any non-negative integer.

keep

Keeps the original VHL output file for troubleshooting purposes, and does notoverwrite it with the post-processor output (.pOp) file. By default, the .pOp file isrenamed to the final output file. The .pOp file resides in the same directory as the VHLpost-processor output file.

links

Retains linkages passed from VHL to the post-processor so you can identify the originof each output element. Links option should only be used along with Cell option. Linksoption alone does not effect processing. This is useful in troubleshooting. The linkageformat is listed below:

word1 - U bit set, class=0, wtf=7word2 - 4265 (hex 10A9) before; 4266 after postprocessingword3 - areano (starting from 1)word4 - attachmentno (from type 5)word5 - bandno (starting from 1)word6 - surface type and surfaceno (low 12 bits)word7 - 4-byte elementno of header element as shown by EDGword8 - used only if word7 is large enough to need two words

Total size: 8 words. Fields useful for tracking output elements are areano,attachmentno, and elementno.

oldgg

Carry source graphic group numbers onto output elements. This can be used with orwithout the cell header option. Be aware that graphic group numbers from differentreference files may not be unique.

pdslevels

Ignore PD_Draw specified output levels, and carry output levels onto output elements.

This feature is not supported by PD_Draw. Using this feature invalidates thecurrent method for controlling VHL graphics, and will result in accumulation ofgraphics output from different runs.

For example, using this option, a drawing with piping and equipment referencemodels using the delivered categories will have revision clouds and triangles,equipment physical, and physical not approved pipe supports all on level 10 inthe drawing.

384

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine


This option should be used only when the drawing will NOT be edited againinside PDS after VHL processing (as when the VHL document will be adeliverable). Running VHL with this post-processor option should be the laststep for creating a deliverable non_PDS drawing.

verbose

Displays post-processor statistics.

385


VHL_PPOPS Command Environment Strings

These are examples of VHL_PPOPS command environment strings from the pds.cmd filewith explanations:

$ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’}=’arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile’;

Invokes arc restroking, backplane elimination, cell re-creation, joining of partialelements, deletes anything less than 5 UORs in length and creates temporary workingcopies of reference files in c:file.

This is a typical user configuration.

ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’}=’arc backp cell join min:5 temp:c:\vhlfile savetemp keep linksverbose’;

Invokes settings as above, with the addition of troubleshooting options. The savetempoption is added to keep the copied reference files after processing. The keep optionmaintains the .pOp file. Links allows tracing of element origins, and verbose providesstatistical information which may be useful.

This is a typical troubleshooting configuration.

386

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine


Commands

Queues — Displays a scrolling list of the queues available for performing the hiddenline removal process.

Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating anddefining queues.

Reference Model Display by System — Indicates that VHL should use reference fileand category settings you selected in the Project Setup. These settings are usedon the basis of disciplines within the drawing types.

If you do not revise a given discipline within a drawing type in Project Setup,VHL uses the active display setting for each of that discipline’s reference models in thedrawing views, as defined in the drawing graphical environment.

Category control will not be restored to its initial state if changed. Youmust reset categories manually after each run, if necessary.

Reference Model Display by User — Indicates that at the time of submission, you willselect the reference file and category settings to be used. The selected settings and filewill be applied to all views in all drawings submitted to VHL for processing.

When you select this option, PDS displays the active settings for the first view in thefirst drawing, as a starting point. You can revise the display settings ON or OFF asrequired for the various reference files and categories. What you set will apply to allviews in all drawings and will apply only to this one VHL submission. It will not affectthe display in the graphical environment.

Reference Model Display by Drawing Settings — Presents no options. With thisselection, each drawing and each view submitted will use its own settings, as displayedin the graphical environment. VHL will process the drawings in a WYSIWYG (WhatYou See Is What You Get) fashion.

387

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Default VHL Drawings/Symbology based VHL Drawings — Toggle Default VHLDrawings to output VHL drawings with the default VHL symbology, or Symbologybased VHL Drawings to output VHL drawings based on different search criteria.Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 393 for more information.

All Drawing Views/Drawing Views by User — Processes all drawing views or letsyou specify the individual drawing views you want processed.

Plot after VHL/No Plotting — Toggle to Plot after VHL to plot the drawing aftercompletion of VHL processing. Selecting the plotting option activates the PlotManager form that allows you to specify plotting parameters for the active drawing.

Visible Only/Visible and Hidden — Toggle to display visible lines only or bothvisible and hidden vector lines.

Submission is Delayed/Submit Immediately — Toggle to complete processing vectorhidden line immediately or delay job submission to batch.

Cleanup Off/On — Toggle On to cleanup lines hidden by the object itself or Off tonot perform cleanup. Lines of one object hidden by another object will still be shown.

Resolution — Select and key in the desired resolution value. The higher the resolutionvalue the longer processing takes, but the output is of better quality. The recommendedstarting value is 5,000, and the recommended range is 3000 to 10000.

Day Hr: Min — Displays the day and time for delayed transmission. These fields areactive only when the submission toggle is set to Submission is Delayed.


Select Drawing Type Select the drawing type for hidden line processing, andselect Accept.

Select Drawing Select the drawing or drawings to be used for vector-hidden-line-removal processing, and then Accept thedrawing.

388

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine


Accept to Submit for ProcessingAccept the selected drawings for processing.

Accept to Submit, or Modify Submit DataSelect the appropriate toggle to set the desiredparameters, then Accept the displayed parametersettings.

The system performs the vector hidden line process and places it in your drawing. A messageindicating the time the job was submitted for processing is displayed if delay submission isselected. The list of drawings is then redisplayed for another selection if desired.

The Vector Hidden Line Manager will automatically compress each drawingonce the previous vector hidden-line removed graphics have been deleted andprior to initiating the vector hidden-line process for the drawing, reducing thedisk space required for large batch requests. It will also reduce the size of theplot files that are generated after a vector hidden-line process by the PlotManager outside of the graphics environment.

To view your hidden line drawing after the vector hidden line process is complete, you mustturn off the drawing view display. Refer to the following Viewing Hidden Line Graphicssection for more information.

389


9.1 Viewing Hidden Line Graphics

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It, along with a series of forms, is used toturn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in thedrawing environment. The Compose Drawing and the Add Category commands are used toperform these steps.

Steps

1. Select Drawing Composition/Annotation from the Drawing Manager form, andactivate the drawing on which the vector hidden line process was run.

Notice that the wire frame drawing views are still displayed.

2. Select Drawing > Composition to activate the Composition palette.

3. Select the Compose Drawing command.

The system displays the Compose Drawing form with a list of drawing views for theselected drawing.

4. Select the appropriate drawing view number from the list.

390

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Viewing Hidden Line Graphics________________ The system activates the Display/Snap/Locate toggles.

5. Toggle from Display On to Display Off to turn the display off for all reference modelsof the selected drawing view, and select Accept.

The system updates the selected drawing view and turns off the display.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for each drawing view associated with the selected drawing.

7. Select View > Viewing to activate the Viewing palette.

8. Select the Category command.

The system activates the Drawing Categories form.

9. Select the Add command.

391

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ The system displays the Add Drawing Categories form.

10. Select the Hidden Line Graphics option to turn on only the hidden line categories, andselect Accept.

11. Select View

Place a data point to identify the screen view(s) to display the vector hidden linegraphics.

The system displays the hidden line graphic categories in the selected view(s). Anexample of hidden line removed drawing graphics is shown in the following figure.


392

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Symbology Based VHL Drawings________________

9.2 Symbology Based VHL Drawings

This option allows you to output VHL drawings based on search criteria set with the SearchCriteria for VHL command.

Before You Begin

Create the required search criteria. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 403 forinformation on creating VHL search criteria for Piping and Equipment.

Edit the file DrwSymMap.mdb in Microsoft Access.

Enter data in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap andDrwTypeSymbMapAssoc tables in Microsoft Access.

Edit the PDS.CMD file to include the following line:

$ENV{’VHL_PPOPS’} = ’hidpdslev pdslevels’;

This option can affect the way that regular VHL drawings are processed. Toavoid inaccuracies, be sure to remove this line from the PDS.CMD file, oruse a separate copy of the PDS.CMD file when processing Symbology basedVHL drawings.

Operating Sequence

1. In PD_Shell, select Drawing Manager > Vector Hidden Line Manager.

2. Select the VHL drawings to create.

3. On the Vector Hidden Line Manager form, set the Default VHL Drawings /Symbology based VHL Drawings toggle to Symbology based VHL Drawings.

393


4. Set the Visible Only / Visible and Hidden toggle to Visible and Hidden if you wantto display the hidden lines as well as the visible lines.

5. Click Accept.

The system creates the new VHL drawings in the vhl subdirectory under the drawingsdirectory. For example, if the drawings directory is ˜\dwg\665 for pipingperspectives, the new VHL drawing is created in the ˜\dwg\665\vhl subdirectory.

This new drawing does not behave like a default VHL drawing. Hence,this step should be the final one in creating the drawings.

Drawings in the ˜\vhl subdirectory are intended to be standaloneMicroStation drawings, and are not updated by subsequentmodifications to PDS models.

394

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Drawing Type and Symbology Map________________

9.2.1 Drawing Type and Symbology Map

This section provides details for using the DrwSymMap.mdb file. This Microsoft Accessfile contains two database tables, SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap andDrwTypeSymbMapAssoc, which control the symbology based VHL drawing creation.Mapping the drawing types controls where the VHL drawings are generated, as well as thesearch criteria used to generate the drawings.

395


9.2.1.1 Drawing Type Map Association

This section provides details for using the DrwTypeSymbMapAssoc table.

Attributes

The following table shows the attributes used in the Drawing Type and Symbology Map,along with their data types and maximum length.

Attribute Name Data Type Length RemarksDrawingtype smallint 2 Codelisted valueMapNumber character 30

The Drawing Type attribute is the codelisted value for the desired drawing type. The MapNumber attribute is a user-defined name that is used in theSearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table.

Sample Map

Drawingtype MapNumber===========================================================663 PipeOneLine665 PipePerspective

396

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

Search Criteria Symbology Map________________

9.2.1.2 Search Criteria Symbology Map

This section provides details for using the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. ThisMicrosoft Access file controls the symbology associated with the search criteria used to createsymbology based VHL drawings.

The search criteria for the Piping and Equipment disciplines are generated using the SearchCriteria for VHL command. Refer to Search Criteria for VHL, page 403 for information ongenerating these search criteria.

The search criteria for EE Raceway and FrameWorks Plus must be entered directly into theSearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table. Refer to EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria,page 398 and FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria, page 401 for information on generatingthese search criteria.

Attributes

Attribute Name Data Type Length RemarksMapNumber character 30 Map Number

from the DrawingType table

SequenceNumber integer 4DisciplineIndexNum smallint 2 discipline_index_no

from pdtable_112SearchCriteriaNumber character 24 search_number

from pdtable_145Color integer 4 Codelisted from

MicroStationcolor table

Level integer 4 MicroStationLevel

Sample Map

MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level===============================================================PipeOneLine 1 1 vhlpip1 2 2PipeOneLine 2 1 vhlpip2 4 4PipePerspective 1 1 vhlpip2 3 5PipePerspective 2 1 vhlpipl 6 10

397


9.2.1.2.1 EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any EE Raceway drawings to be output as symbology based VHLdrawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.

You can define Raceway serach criteria such that all elements belonging to a particular one-line type or system are grouped together, or all elements derived from a specific table in theRaceway reference database are grouped together.

One-line Type Search Criteria

The syntax for one-line type search criteria is:

[any text]_OLT_[One-line type number]

where,

[any text] is any text string.

[One-line type number] is a number referring to the desired one-line type fromthe ol_type table in the re_xxx schema.

Examples of one-line type search criteria include:

Tray_OLT_1 (searching for trays),Cond_OLT_3 (searching for conduits), orAll_Duct_Banks_OLT_5 (searching for duct banks).

The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLTkeyword.

For search criteria based on the one-line type, the software searches for all the children of thatone-line type, as well as the one-line type’s children’s children, and places these elements onthe indicated level using the specified color. For example, if the search criteria defined refersto the one-line type "Tray," the symbologies for all the Raceway connect points (RCPs) andone-lines belonging to this one-line type are changed in the VHL drawing. Also, thesymbologies of all the Straights, Fittings and other children of the RCPs and one-lines arechanged.

Entity Number Based Search Criteria

The syntax for search criteria based on the entity number is:

[any text]_ENT_[Entity number]

where,

398

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

EE Raceway VHL Search Criteria________________ [any text] is any text string.

[Entity number] is the value of the entitynum property in the mscatalogtable of the the re_xxx schema.

Examples of entity number based search criteria include:

OneLines_ENT_204 (searching for all one-lines,centerlines only), orLightFixtures_ENT_250 (searching for all lightfixtures).

The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the OLTkeyword.

The ENT search criteria cannot be applied to all the tables listed in themscatalog table.

System Type Number Based Search Criteria

Each one-line in EE Raceway (such as trays, conduits, etc.) can belong to a system or set ofsystems. Thus, the tray or conduit represented by the one-line carries cables belonging to thesystem to which the tray or conduit belongs. If a tray or conduit belongs to more than onesystem, one of systems in the set is called the active system, and the rest of the systems arecalled sub-systems. For more information on systems, refer to the EE Raceway ModelingReference Guide. For each element, the system checks whether a search criterion has beendefined for the active system to which the element belongs. If so, the system changes thecolor and level of the element to match that assigned to the system.

The syntax for search criteria based on system type number is:

[any text]_SYS_[System type number]

where,

[any text] is any text string.

[System type number] is the value of the system_num property in theee_system table of the the re_xxx schema.

Examples of system type number based search criteria include:

Control_SYS_1 (searching for control systems), orHighVoltage_SYS_3 (searching for high voltage systems).

The search criteria text cannot exceed 47 characters, including the SYSkeyword.

399


Sample Raceway Search Criteria Map

MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level==================================================================RwayPerspective 1 5 Tray_OLT_1 3 5RwayPerspective 2 5 Cond_OLT_3 6 10RwayPerspective 3 5 LitFix_ENT_250 7 12

400

9.Vecto

r H

idd

en-L

ine

FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria________________

9.2.1.2.2 FrameWorks Plus VHL Search Criteria

The search criteria for any FrameWorks Plus drawings to be output as symbology based VHLdrawings must be entered in the SearchCriteriaSymbologyMap table directly.

You can define FrameWorks+ search criteria such that all the elements that belong to thesame category can be grouped together. The valid categories and their correspondingkeywords are:

Category KeywordBeam BEAMColumn COLUMNBrace BRACEArea member AREAArc member ARCVolume member VOLUME

Sample FrameWorks Plus Search CriteriaMap

MapNumber SeqNum DiscIndxNum SrchCritNum Color Level=================================================================StrucPerspective 1 3 BEAM 3 5StrucPerspective 2 3 COLUMN 6 10StrucPerspective 3 3 VOLUME 7 12

401


402

10.Search

C

riteria Fo

r VH

L

Search Criteria for VHL________________

10. Search Criteria for VHL

This command allows you to define the search criteria used to create symbology based VHLdrawings. Refer to Symbology Based VHL Drawings, page 393 for more information.

When you select the Search Criteria for VHL command from the Drawing Managementform, the Search Criteria Data form is displayed.

Use this form to create, copy, revise or delete VHL search criteria for piping and equipment.

This command only assigns search criteria for Piping and Equipment models.Search criteria for HVAC, FrameWorks Plus and EE Raceway must be defineddirectly in the Access database.

Options

Create — Displays the Search Criteria Data Creation form, which adds a new recordof a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.

Copy — Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which copies therecord of an existing VHL search criteria file from the Access database and copies thecorresponding data file.

Revise — Displays the Search Criteria Data File Revision form, which modifies anexisting record of a VHL search criteria file in the Access database.

403

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing VHL search criteriafile as well as its associated record in the Access database.

404

10.Search

C

riteria Fo

r VH

L


10.1 Search Criteria Data Creation Form

When you choose Create from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search Criteria DataCreation form is displayed.

This form creates a VHL search criteria data file in a specified directory. It also creates acorresponding record in the Access database.

Fields and Options



File Specification — The file name (up to 14 characters) of the search criteria data fileto be created.


File Node — The nodename of the system on which the search criteria data file islocated. This field retains the active settings.

405

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Segment Search Criteria — Displays the Search Criteria form, which defines thesegment search criteria for the report. For more information, see Search Criteria -Piping Segment Form, page 154.


Revise AND/OR Relation — Displays a list of And/Or relationships.





Equipment Search Criteria — Displays the Search Criteria - Equipment/Nozzleform, which defines the equipment VHL search criteria.

Operating Sequence

1. From the Search Criteria Data form, click Create

The Search Criteria Data Creation form is displayed.




406

10.Search

C

riteria Fo

r VH

L


After including any models or search criteria for the search criteria data file,be sure to click the final Accept. Because you must accept many forms whilespecifying the discrimination data, it is easy to forget this step. Even thoughyou may have accepted many of the specifications, however, the searchcriteria data file is not actually created until you click Accept on the SearchCriteria Data Creation form.

407


10.2 Search Criteria Data Revision Form

When you choose Copy or Revise from the Search Criteria Data form, the Search CriteriaData File Revision form is displayed.

This form revises an existing search criteria data file. It also copies an existing search criteriadata file; you can then use the revision options to modify the copy as needed. Thecorresponding records in the project control database are copied and/or modified as needed.

Fields and Options



File Specification — The file name, up to 14 characters, of the search criteria file to becreated.




Define Volume — Displays the Volume Definition form, which specifies thecoordinates of a design volume cube for reporting. For more information, see TheDefine Volume Form.

408

10.Search

C

riteria Fo

r VH

L

Search Criteria Data Revision Form________________ Revise AND/OR Relation — Displays a list of And/Or relationships.





Operating Sequence

1. From the Search Criteria Data form, select Copy or Revise.

The Search Criteria Data File Revision form is displayed, with a list of available datafiles.

2. From the displayed list, select a data file to be copied or revised. Then click Accept.



4. Select additional options as needed to define the report search criteria data. Then clickAccept.

409


10.3 Search Criteria Deletion Form



Fields and Options



Operating Sequence



410

10.Search

C

riteria Fo

r VH

L

Search Criteria Deletion Form________________



411


412

11.Plo

t Man

ager

Plot Manager________________

11. Plot Manager

This command provides a PDS-specific plotting interface for drawings external to thegraphics environment. It is used to control reference model display, category display withinthe reference models, and category display within the drawing independently of the default oractive settings in the drawing being plotted. The drawplotsize file in the project directorycontains the default Drawing Plot Size Table. The drawplotsize file can be modified; refer toDrawing Plot Size, page 29 for more information.

Plot Manager provides the following options:

Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing can be setOn or Off.

Display levels for all reference models associated with a specified drawing view can beset On or Off.

Individual reference model display levels associated with a specific drawing view canbe set On or Off.

To plot a drawing using Plot Manager, you must first have a plot queue. Plot queues arecreated automatically when the software is installed.

Plot Manager automatically displays the date and time for the following events:

The most recent activation of the hidden-line graphics process. The date and time willbe preceded by the text VHL:. The data and time will be added to the drawing.

The plotting process. The date and time will be preceded by the text Plotted:.Although the date and time will be plotted on the hard copy of the drawing, the text willnot be added to the actual drawing file.

Through Project Data Manager, you can define the size, font, color, and weight of the textthat displays this information. This text will be displayed on the unique "VHL/PlotDate/Time" drawing category. If the symbology options for this feature are not defined, thefollowing defaults will be used:

Text Size - uses drawing’s active character size

Text Font - uses text font for coordinate labels

Color - set to zero (0)

Weight - set to zero (0)

413


11.1 Plot Drawing

The Plot Manager automatically determines the plot size using the Drawing Plot Size Tablein the project directory on the basis of the drawing size. This command specifies the drawingtype and drawing to be plotted. There is also an option for including or removing referencemodels. Four optional queues, besides the default queue, can be created and defined.

Steps

1. Select Plot Manager from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the Plot Manager form with a Drawing Type display list.


Select the drawing type of drawing(s) you wish to plot, and select Accept to accept.

The system displays a Drawings display list.

414

11.Plo

t Man

ager

Plot Drawing________________

3. Select Drawing

Select all of the drawings to be plotted, and select Accept

The system activates a form with I/Plot parameter file options and process and queueoptions. The system will automatically load the plot queue, plot size, levels, and designfile name in the I/Plot parameter file you select.

Refer to the Queue Setup section for information on creating anddefining queues.

4. Accept to Submit or Select Option

Select Accept if submitting immediately with the default parameters file to the defaultqueue.

— OR —

Select an I/Plot Parameters file to be included with your drawing. If no parameters fileis selected, the system will use the default file.

Select a plot queue. If no queue is selected, the system will use the Default queue.

Specify the number of copies to be plotted; the default value for this field is 1.

Select a scale factor, if desired. The default size is 1.0 (full size); you may enter anypositive number less than 1.0 if you would like to plot a smaller drawing for checkingpurposes.

Set the No Rotation / Rotate 90 Degrees toggle to the desired position.

Set the Default Categories and Reference Models / Select Categories and ReferenceModels toggle to the appropriate position.

415


The default position tells the system to use the categories specified forthat drawing type in the Project Setup form. If no default categoriesexist for that drawing type, the actively displayed categories will beplotted.

This command’s default toggle setting is different from the default setting of thePlot command in the graphics environment.

Toggle from Submit Immediately to Submission is Delayed to specify the time tosubmit the plotted drawing.

— THEN —

Select Accept to submit with the chosen options.

If Default Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes thedrawings, and sends the data to the plot queue for plotting.

If Select Categories and Reference Models is selected, the system processes thedrawing information and displays a list of drawing views associated with the specifieddrawing. The options used to specify the categories to be turned on or off aredisplayed.

5. Select Option or Select Drawing View

Select the Drawing Categories option to review the list of drawing categories that arecurrently displayed in the view and to specify the categories to be turned on or off.Refer to theDrawing Categories section for more information.

— OR —

Select the drawing view and the Reference Models option to review and specify thecategories to be turned on or off for individual reference models associated with thespecific drawing view being plotted. Refer to the Reference Models section for more

416

11.Plo

t Man

ager

Plot Drawing________________ information.

— OR —

Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed forall reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned off for the drawingplot.

— OR —

Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed forall reference models associated with the selected drawing be turned on for the drawingplot.

6. Select Accept to accept the specified plot processing information.

The system processes the information and submits the plotted drawing to the plot queueat the time previously specified.

7. Select Cancel to exit the form. To exit the form without submitting the plots, select theShell or Top buttons.

The actual drawing size is set by the plot queue in relation to the plotsize.

417


11.1.1 Drawing Categories

This option activates the Drawing Categories form. It is used to specify the categories to beturned on or off for the drawing plot. The categories that are turned on are highlighted. Whenyou select a highlighted category, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category isturned off.


Select Category Select the categories to turn off or on for the drawing tobe plotted, and select Accept to accept the selectedcategories.

418

11.Plo

t Man

ager


11.1.2 Reference Models

This option activates the Reference Models form. It is used to select reference models andreview and specify the individual reference model categories to be turned on or off for thespecific drawing view being plotted.


The drawing view must be selected from the top of the Plot Manager form.

Commands

All Reference Models Display OFF — Specifies that the categories displayed for allof the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for the drawingplot.

All Reference Models Display ON — Specifies that the categories displayed for all ofthe reference models associated with the drawing view to be turned on for the drawingplot.

Reference Model Categories — Reviews and specifies the categories to be turned onor off for a specific reference model.

Field Descriptions

Disc/Model Name — Displays the available models available for plotting.

419


Steps

1. Select the Reference Models option from the Plot Manager form.

The system activates the Reference Models form with a list of reference models for thespecified drawing view to be plotted.

2. Select Option or Select Reference Model

Select All Reference Models Display OFF to specify that the categories displayed forall of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned off for thedrawing plot.

— OR —

Select All Reference Models Display ON to specify that the categories displayed forall of the reference models associated with the drawing view be turned on for thedrawing plot.

— OR —

Select the desired reference model from the list of models at the top of the form, andselect the Reference Model Categories option to review and specify the categories tobe turned on or off for a specific reference model.

The system activates the Review Model Categories form.

The categories that are turned on are highlighted. When you select a highlightedcategory, the highlight is removed to indicate that the category is turned off.

3. Select Category

Select the categories that you wish to turn off or on for the drawing to be plotted.

420

11.Plo

t Man

ager


4. Select Accept to accept the specified categories to be turned on or off.

The system processes the specified drawing plot information and returns to the PlotManager form.

421


422

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Project Planner________________

12. Project Planner

The Project Planner option activates the interactive graphics environment to allow you tocreate unassigned drawing views. After an unassigned view is created, it can be assigned toonly one drawing.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Project Planner from the Drawing Management form.

2. The first time you select this option, the system prompts

Key plan file does not exist, Accept to Create

Select Accept to create the project key plan model.

The system copies the model seed file to the file keyplan.dgn in the project directory.

Key Plan model successfully created

The system activates the graphics command environment for the project key planmodel.

Refer to the description of the graphics environment in the DrawingComposition/Annotation section for more information on working in graphics.

423


12.1 Project Planner Command Menu

The command menu at the bottom of the screen provides fast access to commonly usedMicroStation and PDS commands. The following commands are available on the ProjectPlanner Command Menu.

PlotPlan — The Plot Plan commands create unassigned drawing views, and allowspecification of viewing options.

View — This pull-down provides view manipulations. All of these commands resultin modifying what is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate theview of the model but do not manipulate the actual model.

File — This pull-down provides basic file manipulation commands, such ascompressing and exiting the file. It also includes commands which allow you to plotdrawings or select another drawing.

Element — This pull-down provides the Analyze command used to open the ElementInformation settings box.

Settings — This pull-down provides the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colorsused during a graphics session.

User — This pull-down allows you to modify things that apply only to your systemsuch as how memory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how variousitems on the screen are laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default,and so on. As the name implies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.

424

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

PlotPlan________________

12.1.1 PlotPlan

Commands

Drawing Views — Activates the form used to create unassigned drawing views.

Viewing Options — Activates a form consisting of viewing options.

Exit — Exits Project Planner, and returns you to the Drawing Management menu.

425


12.1.1.1 Drawing Views

This command activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form. It is used to create adrawing view. You can specify the drawing view by using a saved view definition created fora screen view in the model, selecting the orientation and specifying the clipping volumecoordinates to be used, or defining a volume about a specified named item. This commandalso specifies the active category data for the drawing view.

Commands

Standard View Buttons — Define the orientation of the drawing view. These buttonsinclude: Plan, Looking East, Looking North, Isometric, Looking West, LookingSouth, and Plan (Vertical).

Delete Unassigned Views — Deletes an existing unassigned view.

Update Views — Updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.

Select Model — Identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to becreated.

Named Item — Uses the coordinates and clipping volume of a named item to definethem for the drawing view.

Saved View — Uses coordinates and clipping volume of the saved view to define themfor the drawing view.

Graphic Symbology — Defines the graphic symbology for the Key Plan model.

426

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Drawing Views________________

Field Descriptions

View Number — Key in the drawing view number (short code - up to 24 characters)for the unassigned drawing view to be created. The system verifies that the number isunique within the project.

View Name — Key in the drawing view name (long description - up to 40 characters)associated with the specified drawing view.

View Scale — The system displays a scale display list. Select a new scale value for theview to be created.

Model Number — Key in the model number to identify the model for the unassigneddrawing view or select the Select Model option from the bottom of the form to selectthe model from a series of forms.

Drawing View Volume fields — The Low and High columns and the Easting,Northing, and Elevation fields display the volume for the drawing view.



Steps

1. Select the Drawing Views command from the panel menu.

The system activates the Create Unassigned Drawing Views form.

2. Specify the required view information for the drawing view being created.

3. Select one of the seven view orientation options from the center of the form.

4. Select the Drawing View Volume fields and key in the absolute Easting, Northing,and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X".(You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negativeelevation.)

Then, key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the secondcorner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first cornerpoint.

— OR —

Select the Saved View option to use a model saved view to define the orientation andclipping volume of the drawing view. Key in the name of the saved view for the modelspecified in the Model Number field.

427


— OR —

Select the Named Item option to use a pre-defined named item to define the clippingvolume for the drawing view. (See the section describing the Named Itemoption.)

5. Accept or Select Other Options

Accept the displayed coordinate values.

Creating Drawing View


428

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Delete Unassigned View________________

12.1.1.1.1 Delete Unassigned View

This option activates the Delete Unassigned View form. It is used to delete anexisting unassigned drawing view.

Field Descriptions

Orientation: — Displays all of the possible orientations for a drawingview.

Number/Name — Displays all of the unassigned drawing views for aselected orientation.

Steps

1. Select the Delete Unassigned View option from the Create UnassignedDrawing Views form.

The system displays the Delete Unassigned Views form.

2. Select Orientation

Select the view orientation for the unassigned drawing view to be deleted.

The system displays the unassigned drawing views for the selectedorientation.

— OR —

No Unassigned Drawing View Defined If there are no views for theselected orientation.

429


3. Select Unassigned Views

Select the unassigned drawing views to be deleted and select Accept.

The system deletes the selected view and updates the form.

430

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Update Views________________

12.1.1.1.2 Update Views

This option updates the screen display for the unassigned drawing views.

431


12.1.1.1.3 Select Model

This option identifies the model file for the unassigned drawing view to be created.

1. The system displays the disciplines for the active project.

Select Discipline or Exit

Select the discipline for the model file and select Accept.

The system displays the Design Area display list for the selected discipline.

2. Select Area or Exit

Select the design area for the model file and select Accept.

3. Select Model

Select the model file and select Accept.

432

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Named Item________________

12.1.1.1.4 Named Item

This option activates the Create View Of Named Item form. It uses pre-defined named itemto specify the data coordinates and clipping volume to be used in the drawing view.


The view number and name of the unassigned drawing view to be created must be specified inthe Create Unassigned Drawing View form.

The appropriate name attribute must have been defined for the item.

Steps

1. Select the Named Item option from the Create Unassigned Drawing View form.

The system activates the Create View Of Named Item form.

2. Specify Tag Number

Select and key in the appropriate item number to specify either the Piping ComponentNumber, Engineered Item Number, Instrument Tag Number, EquipmentNumber, or Nozzle Number of the specified item.

For an equipment nozzle, the system also prompts for the equipmentgroup number.

The system displays the Delta Coordinates associated with the named item.

These coordinates define the distance from the center to the edges of the cube which fitsthe named item. You can change any of the Delta Coordinates to revise the displayed

433

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ clipping volume.

Accept the displayed values.

The system returns to the Create Drawing View form and updates the coordinatevalues.

434

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Graphic Symbology________________

12.1.1.1.5 Graphic Symbology

This option activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form. It is used to definethe graphic symbology (level, color, line weight, and line style) for the Key Plan model.

Steps

1. Select the Graphic Symbology option from the Create Unassigned Drawing Viewform.

The system activates the Project Key Plan Graphic Symbology form.

2. Select the field for the symbology value to be revised.

3. Level

Place a data point along the slider to set the MicroStation display level.

Color

The system activates the Select Color form which displays the active color settings forthe project. Select the color from the form and select Accept.

435

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Weight

Place a data point along the slider to set the weight.

Select Symbology

Select the desired symbology option.

4. Accept the specified symbology changes.

436

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Viewing Options________________

12.1.1.2 Viewing Options

This command provides access to a set of options that allow you to manipulate the modelviews for each screen or window.

437


12.1.1.2.1 Set View Orientation

The Plan View, Iso View, Looking North, Looking South, Looking East, andLooking West commands allow you to set the view orientation to one of thestandard viewing directions. You can specify more than one screen with thesame view.

The default screen orientations are:

Plan View — Orients a screen to the plan view orientation.

Isometric View — Orients a screen to the isometric viewing direction.

Looking North — Orients a screen view looking north.

Looking South — Orients a screen view looking south.

Looking East — Orients a screen view looking east.

Looking West — Orients a screen view looking west.

438

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Update Window________________

12.1.1.2.2 Update Window

The Update View commands updates the screen display for a virtual screen or a specifiedview.

Update Both — Updates both (left and right) virtual screens.

Update View — Updates the selected window view. The system prompts you to selectthe view to update.

Update Left — Updates the left virtual screen.

Update Right — Updates the right virtual screen.

439


12.1.1.2.3 Rotate About View

The Rotate About View commands allow you to rotate a view about theselected axis (X, Y or Z). The angle follows the Right Hand Rule with thethumb pointing toward the positive axis.

Rotate About X Axis — Rotates the horizontal axis of a screen viewcounter-clockwise.

Rotate About Y Axis — Rotates the vertical axis of a screen viewcounter-clockwise.

Rotate About Z Axis — Rotates the X and Y axes of a screen viewcounter-clockwise.

440

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Match Planar Element________________

12.1.1.2.4 Match Planar Element

The Match Planar Element command allows you to establish a view normal to a planarelement.

441


12.1.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points

The Rotation 3 Points command allows you to rotate the view orientation so that you arelooking normal to the X and Y planes defined by the three points. The first two data pointsdefine the X axis. The line between the first and third data points define the Y axis.


Enter first point @x axis origin Place a data point to define the origin ofthe X axis.

Enter second point on x axis Place a data point to define the positivedirection of the X axis.

Enter point to define y axis Place the third data point to define the Yaxis. The viewing plane will be parallelto the plane defined by the three datapoints.

442

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Dialog View Rotation________________

12.1.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation

This command activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.

443


12.1.1.2.7 Color Shading

The Permanent Color Shading and Color Shading options are used to renderthe contents of a screen view. When you select either of the color shadingoptions the system displays a list of render options.

Select the option for the type of rendering to be performed and select the screenview to be processed.

For Permanent Color Shading, select a view number from the form (1-8). The selected view will display with the specified render option untilyou change it.

For Color Shading, place a data point in the screen view to be updated.The rendered view will revert to wireframe display when it is updated.

Wiremesh

This option renders the contents of a view(s) as a wiremesh display. Wiremeshdisplay is similar to the default wireframe display in that all elements aretransparent and do not obscure other elements. In a wiremesh display, however,curved surfaces are represented by a polygonal mesh rather than a simplewireframe. This representation can increase the realism of curved surfaces,although it may also increase the amount of clutter as more lines are displayedfor surfaces that would normally be hidden.

444

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Color Shading________________

Cross-Section

This option renders the contents of a view as a cross-section. If an auxiliarycoordinate system (ACS) is active, the cross-section is cut at the X-Y plane ofthe ACS. Otherwise it is cut at the views active depth (parallel to the view).

Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a polygon display. In a polygondisplay, only parts of elements that would actually be visible are displayed.Lines hidden behind objects are removed to create a more realisticrepresentation. MicroStation accomplishes this by decomposing each elementinto polygons. Hidden line removal processing is much slower than wireframeand wiremesh display, and the processing time is roughly equivalent to theother, more realistic type of rendering.

Filled Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a filled polygon display. A filledpolygon display is identical to a polygon display except that the polygons arefilled with element color. This creates an interesting cartoon-like effect that maybe useful in some circumstances, particularly if the hardware can display only alimited number of colors.

Constant Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a constant shaded model. In aconstant shaded model, each element is displayed as one or more polygons filledwith a single (constant) color. The color is computed once for each polygonfrom the element color, material characteristics, and lighting configuration (see3D concepts in the user’s guide). Curved surfaces are decomposed into a meshof polygons. Each polygon is shaded with a single color and surfaces appeartiled.

Smooth Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a smooth (Gouraud) shaded model.In smooth shaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is more realisticthan in constant shaded models because polygon color is computed at polygonboundaries and color is blended across polygon interiors. This gives surfaces asmooth appearance.

445


Phong Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model. This is themost realistic type of rendering supported by MicroStation.

In a Phong shaded model, the color of each pixel is recomputed. Phong shadingis useful for producing high-quality images when speed is not critical and veryexact lighting effects are desired. If light sources are close to the objects beingrendered, such as a spotlight shining on a home, Phong shading may be the onlyway to see the exact location of the light beam.

Large numbers of computations slow display time considerably. In mostinstances, Phong shaded models are very similar to smooth shaded models anddo not justify the increased processing time.

Stereo

This option renders the contents of a view as a 3D image. It creates a stereo pairof images and merges the two images into a single image, which you can viewby wearing red/blue glasses. Put on the red/blue glasses making sure that the redlens is over the left eye and the blue lens is over the right eye. View the imagewith your eyes level and square to the screen.

446

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Camera View________________

12.1.1.2.8 Camera View

This option activates five options used to define the target, position, and clipping planes for aview camera.

Camera Setup

This option lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera and turn onthe camera for the view. The camera lens is set with the Camera Lens option.

To define the camera target use a data point. The point becomes the focal point (center) of theview. Objects beyond the target point will appear smaller due to the nature of the perspectiveprojection. Objects in front of the target point will appear larger and may be excluded fromthe viewing pyramid.

Place a data point to define the camera position. A dynamic pyramid displays to show theviewing volume with the camera at the pointer location.

Place a data point to define the front clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portionsof elements in front of this plane are not displayed.

Place a final data point to define the back clipping plane (display depth). Any elements orportions of elements beyond this plane are not displayed, but the view is turned on.

447


Camera Target

This option lets you set the target of a view camera without changing the camera position.This is like standing in one position and moving the camera to view different targets.

Camera Position

This option lets you set the position of a view camera without changing the camera target.This is like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views ofthe object.

Camera Lens

This option activates the camera lens settings display list. This list lets you set the angles andfocal lengths of view camera lenses.

The camera lens settings displayed are for the view chosen from the view number option.

Angle/Focal Length

The lens angle for the camera of the chosen view can be specified in degrees or as the lensfocal length in millimeters (mm). You can also specify the lens by choosing a standard lensfrom the Standard option menu. The angles and focal lengths of the standard lenses are:

Standard Lens Angle Focal Length (mm)

Fisheye 93.3 20Extra Wide 74.3 28Wide 62.4 35Normal 46.0 50Portrait 28.0 85Telephoto 12.1 200Telescopic 2.4 1000

Camera Off

This option turns the camera view off.

448

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Views________________

12.1.1.2.9 Views

The Views commands allow you to manipulate views between two specified windows.

Copy View — copies a selected view display from one window to another.

Swap View — option allows you to change from either the right or left screen display.

View On — option activates eight view options which correspond to the window views(1-4) on the right screen and window views (5-8) on the left screen.

View Off — option allows you to select and place a data point in the window views toturn specified views off.

449


12.1.1.2.10 Level Symbology On

This command provides the option to enable the display of reference modelswith the active reference model symbology.

450

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Level Symbology Off________________

12.1.1.2.11 Level Symbology Off

This command provides the option to disable the display of reference models with the activereference model symbology.

451


12.1.1.2.12 Form Left/Right Screen

The Form Left Screen / Form Right Screen toggle sets forms to be automatically displayedon the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screenconfigurations.

452

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Exit________________

12.1.1.3 Exit


453


12.1.2 View

Refer to View, page 197 for a description of the Viewing commands. The Viewingcommands on this palette are the same commands as the ones appearing on the Viewingcommand palette for Composition/Annotation, with the exception of Viewing Options. TheViewing Options palette contains the same commands as described earlier in this chapter forthe PlotPlan command palette. Refer to Viewing Options, page 437 for a description of theViewing Options commands.

454

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

File________________

12.1.3 File

Commands

File Design — Saves the active parameters defined in the current design session.

Exit — Exits the design file.

455


12.1.3.1 File Design

The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the currentdesign session. This command saves:

MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes.

PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location ofthe Piping Designer base form.

456

12.Pro

ject P

lann

er

Exit________________

12.1.3.2 Exit


457


458

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Project Setup________________

13. Project Setup

This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaultsfor all drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawingdirectories, network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type.These fields, displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the optionsat the top of the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawingtypes are available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory foreach drawing type.

There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and networkaddress of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type mayuse either the project cell library or an alternate cell library. For more information about cells,the project cell library, and alternate cell libraries, refer to Drawing Manager Theory ofOperation, page 24.

Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined referencecategories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of thatdrawing type. Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the definedreference categories, will not be availabel for selection as reference models.

Commands

Drawing Type — Displays the project drawing types. Refer to Drawing Type, page463 for more information.

Reference Categories — Defines a default list of reference-model data categories thatdetermines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It alsofilters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verifyoption. See Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for more information.

459

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Copy Drawing Type — Copies an existing project setup. Refer to Copy DrawingType, page 468 for more information.

Remove Reference — Removes all reference model data categories in a givendrawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option forthe project. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information.

Plotting Categories — Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for aspecific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placinga data point on the appropriate category names. See Plotting Categories, page 471 formore information.

Label Filter — Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specificdrawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point onthe appropriate label names. See Label Filter, page 472 for more information.

Field Descriptions

All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms:

Drawing Directory — Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.

Network Address — Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawingfile.

Drawing Scale — Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing.This sets the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise eachdrawing. The scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawingview can be modified at time of creation.

English Units - m’ m" = n’ n" — Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is thescale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawingrepresents 1 foot in the model.

Metric Units - n:nn — Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on themodel. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm inthe model.

Drawing Size — Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border sizes.

460

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Project Setup________________ Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup sectionfor information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawingtypes.

EnglishA 8 1/2 X 11B 11 X 17C 17 X 22D 22 X 34E 34 X 44F 28 X 40

MetricA0 840mm X 1189mmA1 595mm X 840mmA2 420mm X 595mmA3 297mm X 420mmA4 210mm X 297mm

Cell Library Name — Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for thisdrawing type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen bydefault.

Cell Directory — Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides.

Cell Network Address — Specifies the network address of the machine on which thecell library resides.

Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File — Specifies whether the project seed drawingor an alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seeddrawings, named draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory.See Seed Files, page 31 for more information on this option.

Steps

1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list.

2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form.

The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to beselected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, thesystem activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawingtype.

If there is a drawing category whose default values you would like to copy, select theCopy Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types.When a drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the systemwill copy the default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type intothe fields of the previously-selected drawing type.

461


3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option.

The system activates a form which allows you to modify a list of reference categories toremove or include when creating a drawing in the project.

4. Select the Plotting Categories option.

The system activates a form which allows you to pick plotting categories to remove orinclude when creating a drawing in the project.

5. Select the Label Filter option.

The system activates a form which allows you to pick annotation labels thta will bedisplayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment.

6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate forthis drawing type.

462

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Drawing Type________________

13.1 Drawing Type

This option activates the Drawing Type field. It is used to define the default settings for eachdrawing in a new project.

Steps

1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the Project Setup form and the Drawing Type display list.

2. Specify Drawing Type

Select a drawing type from the list. You can have one default directory for eachavailable drawing type in your project.

3. Specify the default drawing file pathname/network address.

4. Select the Reference Categories option to add reference categories to define whichdisciplines will be displayed in the drawings of the specified drawing type. SeeReference Categories, page 465 for more information.

5. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories so that the modelswithin the specified disciplines will not be displayed in the drawings created in thisdirectory. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information.

6. Accept or Reject

Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.

463


— OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.

464

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Reference Categories________________

13.2 Reference Categories

This option activates a Reference Categories display list. It is used to determine the defaultdisciplines that are available to be attached to a view when reference files are attached.

It is also used to select the default reference categories and model data display categories for aspecified drawing type. These categories can be toggled to on or off by highlighting or de-highlighting them.

Like all of the other options on the Project Setup form, this option first displays a list ofreference categories. It then allows you to selectively set the default model data displaycategories.

If a discipline is not selected, it will not appear in the list of disciplinesavailable for attachment.

Steps

1. Select the Reference Categories option to define reference models for the defaultdrawing setup.

The system activates the Reference Categories display list.

2. Select a category and select Accept.

The system displays a list of available reference model data display categories, andindicates whether listed categories are turned On or Off during the drawing viewcreation and during VHL processing.

465


3. You may control all categories for drawing view creation and VHL by using the Turnon All Create Categories and the Turn on All VHL Categories options.

You may also toggle selected categories Off or On for drawing view creation and/orVHL processing by placing a data point on the current setting. When the categories areturned off, they are no longer highlighted.

Turning a category On for creation means that whenever a drawing view is created, thespecified category will be displayed in the drawing view.

Turning a category On for VHL means that the specified category will be processed forVHL. Turning a category Off for VHL means that the specified category will beignored by VHL.

4. You may also override the default symbology for the active discipline by using theDefine Reference Symbology command. This will allow each discipline’s referencefile symbology to be set for display, VHL (and, therefore, plotting). When the defaultsymbology is used, the toggles on this form are all set to Disabled.

Toggling Color to the Enabled setting activates the Reference Model SymbologyColor form. This form allows you to select which color you would like to use torepresent the active discipline. These settings are used for the categories set to On forVHL.

466

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Reference Categories________________ Toggling Style to the Enabled setting displays the available line styles. This allowsyou to select which line style you would like to use to represent the active discipline.

Toggling Weight to the Enabled setting displays the available line weights. Thisallows you to select which line weight you would like to use to represent the activediscipline.

Set the symbology options to obtain the desired effects.

— THEN —

Select Accept to return to the Project Setup form.

— OR —

Select Cancel to return to the Project Setup form and discard all changes.

The user-defined reference symbology settings for VHL in this form applyonly to the visible edges from the VHL output. Refer to the Hidden LineData section in the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide formore information about setting user-defined symbology for the hidden lines(as opposed to the visible edges).

467


13.3 Copy Drawing Type

This option activates the Copy Drawing Type field. It is used to copy previously defineddefaults for the drawings in a specified drawing type directory for use in drawings in anotherdrawing type. The default reference categories and model data display categories can then bemodified.

Steps

1. Select the Project Setup option from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the Project Setup form and a Drawing Type list with a list of thedrawing types that have been defined.

2. Select the Copy Drawing Type option.

The system displays a Drawing Type display list with the drawing types that havepreviously defined project setups.

3. Specify Drawing Type

Select the drawing type of the project setup to be copied.

The system automatically displays the information for that project setup.

4. Select the Drawing Type option.

5. Select the new drawing type for the copied project setup.

468

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Copy Drawing Type________________

6. Key in any modification to the location and size fields.

7. Select the Reference Categories option to modify reference categories and model datadisplay categories for the drawing type in the specified directory. See ReferenceCategories, page 465 for more information.

8. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference categories from the drawingtype in the specified directory. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information.

9. Accept the Project Setup and return to the Drawing Management form.

— OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the Drawing Management form.

469


13.4 Remove Reference

This option activates a Remove Reference display list. It is used to remove referencecategories for the project setup default for creating a drawing or drawing view in a specifieddrawing type. This command removes the default model disciplines defined by the ReferenceCategories command or those included in a copied project setup.

Steps

1. Select the Remove Reference option to remove reference model definitions from theproject setup.

The system displays the Remove Reference display list that contains all of thecategories that are defined for the project.

2. Select Disciplines to Remove and Accept

Select the categories to remove and select Accept.

— OR —


470

13.Pro

ject Setu

p

Plotting Categories________________

13.5 Plotting Categories

This option activates a Plotting Categories display list. It is used to specify which levels inan attached model are to be plotted for a specific drawing type.

Steps

1. Select the Plotting Categories option to remove plotting category definitions from theproject setup.

The system displays the Plotting Categories display list that contains all of thecategories that are defined to be plotted for the project.

2. Select Categories to Remove and Accept

Select the categories to remove and select Accept.

— OR —


471


13.6 Label Filter

This option activates a Label Filter display list. It is used to specify which types of labelswill be displayed for a specific drawing type.

Steps

1. Select the Label Filter option to remove labels from the list.

The system displays the display list that contains all of the labels that are defined to bedisplayed for the project.

2. Select Labels to Remove and Accept

Select the labels to remove and select Accept.

— OR —


472

14.Plo

t Setu

p

Man

ager

Plot Setup Manager________________

14. Plot Setup Manager

This option activates the I/Plot Parameter Files form. It is used to create I/Plot Parameterrecords. Specifically, the Plot Manager sets the following I/Plot options automatically on thebasis of available drawing management data: Queue, View, Region, Units, X Size, Y Size,Scale, Data Rescale, Rotation, Design, and Levels.

To select any other I/Plot options, the I/Plot Parameter records must be pre-defined in theProject Control Database, and the I/Plot Parameter files must be created using the I/Plotproduct.

Commands

Create — Creates I/Plot Parameter records. This option is activated by default whenthe form appears. See the Create I/Plot Parameter File, page 475 section for moreinformation.

Revise — Revises existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Revise I/Plot ParameterFile, page 477 section for more information.

Delete — Deletes existing I/Plot Parameter records. See the Delete I/Plot ParameterFile, page 479 section for more information.

473


Field Descriptions

I/Plot Number — Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to becreated (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters long).

Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and a blank space cannotbe used to define the I/Plot number.

I/Plot Description — Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumericvalue up to 40 characters).

File Specification — Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14characters).

Path Name — Defines directory path (up to 36 characters) specifying the directory tocontain the parameter file.

Workstation/Server Name — Defines the workstation node address to contain thedrawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).

Steps

1. Select the Plot Setup Manager option from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the I/Plot Parameter File form.

2. Select one of the options.

— OR —


474

14.Plo

t Setu

p

Man

ager

Create I/Plot Parameter File________________

14.1 Create I/Plot Parameter File

This command is used to define the name, description, and the full file specification for anI/Plot Parameter file. You can choose from any of the I/Plot Parameter files created with thePlot Setup Manager at the time of plotting, otherwise the system will use the default I/PlotParameter file.

Field Descriptions

I/Plot Number — Defines the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to becreated (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).

Special characters such as & $ @ - / . + = # * and blank spaces cannotbe used to define the I/Plot number.

I/Plot Description — Defines the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumericvalue up to 40 characters).

File Specification — Defines the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14characters).

Path Name — Defines the directory path specifying the directory to contain theparameter file (up to 36 characters).

Workstation/Server Name — Defines the workstation node address to contain thedrawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).

475


Steps

1. Specify I/Plot Number

Key in the I/Plot identification and location information.

2. Select Accept to create the I/Plot Parameter file.

— OR —


476

14.Plo

t Setu

p

Man

ager

Revise I/Plot Parameter File________________

14.2 Revise I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select a parameterfile to revise. One or all of the fields can be revised using this option.

Field Descriptions

I/Plot Number — Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to berevised (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).


I/Plot Description — Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumericvalue up to 40 characters).

File Specification — Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14characters).

Path Name — Displays the directory path specifying the directory location to containthe parameter file (up to 36 characters)

Workstation/Server Name — Displays the workstation node address to contain thedrawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).

Steps

1. Select the Revise option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.

The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.

477


2. Select I/Plot Parameter for Revision

Select the parameter file to be revised.

The system displays the information on the file selected.

3. Revise I/Plot Data

Place a data point in the field to be changed and key in the new information.

4. Select Accept to effect the changes to the I/Plot Parameter file.

— OR —


478

14.Plo

t Setu

p

Man

ager

Delete I/Plot Parameter File________________

14.3 Delete I/Plot Parameter File

This command activates an I/Plot Parameter File display list. It is used to select theparameter file to delete. All of the parameter files accessed by the Drawing Manager can bedeleted.

Field Descriptions

I/Plot Number — Displays the I/Plot number (short name) of the parameter file to bedeleted (an alphanumeric value up to 24 characters).


I/Plot Description — Displays the I/Plot Parameter file description (an alphanumericvalue up to 40 characters).

File Specification — Displays the file specification (an alphanumeric value up to 14characters).

Path Name — Displays the directory path location of the directory that contains theparameter file (up to 36 characters).

Workstation/Server Name — Displays the workstation node address that contains thedrawing file (an alphanumeric value up to 26 characters).

479


Steps

1. Select the Delete option from the I/Plot Parameter File form.

The system displays a list of the existing parameter files.

2. Select I/Plot Parameter file for Deletion

Select the Parameter file to be deleted

Accept to Delete I/Plot Parameter Definition

Select Accept to delete.

— OR —


480

A. E

rror

Messag

es

Appendix A: Error Messages________________

Appendix A Error Messages

The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.

pdsmc.msg - command field messages

pdsme.msg - error and warning messages

pdsmp.msg - prompts and messages

pdsms.msg - status messages.

481


482

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

Glossary

absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) thatlocates a file. See also path name and relative path name.

active depth The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and performmanipulations.

active process The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls themessage fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has ahighlighted window icon strip.

application software Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software whichruns other software.

batch processing A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into agroup (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream withoutuser intervention.

batch queue A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batchqueue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batchoptions screen menu.

branch point A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can beassigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows forplacement of branch components.

cancel button The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X orthe word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option.

cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as agroup, and then manipulated as individual elements.

character A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data.

client In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function onthe remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database,NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/serverrelationship.

column An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in adatabase.

command Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data.

confirm button A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains agreen check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiatea specified option.

483


coordinate The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis.

coordinate system A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the designcube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinatesystem, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of thedesign cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to moreeasily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example,you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere,and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on acylinder.

coordinates An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in acoordinate system.

core files The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the mostcommon of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors,and user-generated quit signals.

cursor The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.

data button The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to acceptpreviously selected elements, and to select commands from forms andmenus.

data entry field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known askey-in field.

data point A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points selectcommands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identifyand accept elements, and activate windows and perform windowmanipulations.

database A collection of comprehensive informational files having predeterminedstructure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, orprocessed by a specific program.

database table The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and containsinformation about the project and design elements.

default The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied bythe system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user.

delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.

delimiter A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguouscharacters that mark the end of a string of characters.

device A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto whicha user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.

484

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

directory A file that contains the names of other files.

display-list box A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field.When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Inputcan then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in theinformation.

domain The set of acceptable values for a value within a component.

dragging Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an elementso you can see it move.

easting A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, differencein longitude.

entity An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about whichinformation is stored; a relational database table.

envelope file See interference envelope.

file specification A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file.

filename A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name shouldbe relevant to the contents of the file.

form An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Becausemany of the screen menus in the application software are built withI/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.

full path name The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the filename. See also relative path name.

gadget A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds toinformation. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.

header The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. Theheader contains information on the structure and contents of the file.

hierarchy A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents)for grouping files or commands.

icon A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies acommand.

Informix A relational database management system supported by RIS.

Ingres A relational database management system supported by RIS.

interference envelope An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used inconjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking.Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology todistinguish them from primitives.

485


invert elevation The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.

isometric Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes atright angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn atan angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from thebase.

key An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle toindividual rows of the table.

key-in field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as adata entry field.

keypoint A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap.

keyword A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certainfunction.

menubar The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selectingcommands.

message area The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you areworking in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, theCurrent Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field.

model A graphic representation or schema.

network An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them toshare data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connectthe system, or it can mean the connected system.

NFS Network File System, the system that provides access to data that isdistributed among machines through an interconnection of host computersand workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your localworkstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS isusually used to access centralized data on a server.

node Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connectedto a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data andsystem control.

node address The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it ismanufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicatewith another node in the network.

node name A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on anetwork.

northing A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinatesystem.

486

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection pointto piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but ratherrepresents the face-of-flange coordinate.

NQS Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to definenetwork-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting uplocal resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside andsetting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to theresources.

Oracle A relational database management system supported by RIS.

origin In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect.

origin point The point at which the coordinate system is placed.

orthogonal view A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines whichare orthogonal to the plane.

parameter A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior ofsomething.

path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading toa command.

path name The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path nameand relative path name.

PDS Plant Design System

pipe queue A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues onremote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.

place data point To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file.

plane A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but islevel, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional.

RDB Reference Database.

reference database A collection of reference data containing information relative to industrydesign codes, vendor’s catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries,graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and otherinformation of a similar manner.

relative path name The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particularfile. See also path name and absolute path name.

rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution abouta specific axis.

487


row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values fora table.

rubberbanding The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a datapoint while the element changes as you move the cursor.

schema A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.

schema file A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database.

server In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performsa common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS,NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.

Structured QueryLanguage SQL

Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and queryingrelational databases.

style The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid,and so forth.

surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.

symbology The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.

table A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locationsin memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of thesame type.

toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives.

user name A name that provides access to an account on the system.

values Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that arestored in an attribute.

variable A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values.

vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally representedas a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented asa coordinate triple (x,y,z).

view The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see aprescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x,y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while thez-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation withrespect to the design cube. See also active depth.

virtual memory External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extensionof the computer’s internal memory. The software uses virtual memory tostore data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk untilthey are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores aminimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly.

488

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

489


490

Ind

ex

Index________________

Index

Aactive

options 216add

drawing category 205model category 283

aligndrawing view 286

align view 207alternate

cell libraries 35drawing categories 33

alternate seed file 31analyze 222annotation 293

automatic labels 369display report 330drawing

annotation symbology 343overlay 338

labelscenterlines 315update 379

mass annotationoptions 298

name labels 346options 349

overlay drawing 338place cell 333place labels

options 304place text and line 335revision markers 328update labels 321, 379

Approval form 186approve

drawing 192approving reports 186attach

model 125, 275overlay drawing 338

attributesspecifying 154

automaticattach and verify reference models 128labels 369

automatic (continued)labels (continued)

define search criteria 373label fence contents 372

automatic title block generation 42

Bborders 27bottom-to-top 197button assignments 225

Ccamera 198

lens 448off 448position 448setup 447target 448view 447

cascade 197categories 33cells

and cell libraries 35center

window 200cmds 195code lists 39color 343

shading 444colors 223compose

drawing 263align drawing view 286delete drawing view 285revise

orientation 290view data 288

unassigned views 292view 265

compose drawingreference models 269

composing drawings 227constant shading 445coordinate

label 358

491

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ copy 198

active drawing 271another drawing 273drawing 68drawing view 253reference models

from active drawing 120from another drawing 122

copy drawingdrawing view data 71

copy view 207create

compositeview 241

composite drawingview

define views 244composite drawing view 89

define views 93from saved view 95

drawing 59view 73, 228

define view location 239named item 232

model 234project 236

saved view 238drawing view 73

ASCII file 63define view location 84from named item 77

model 79project 81

from saved view 83InterPlot parameter file 475options 57plan view 259section view 256

cross-section 445customization

automatic title block generation 42display dimensions in whole millimeters 49Drawing Manager 41nominal pipe diameter value 48using alternate cell libraries 35using alternate drawing categories 33using alternate seed files 31

Ddatabase

tables 36

definecomposite drawing

with saved view 95composite drawing with saved view 246search criteria

for automatic labels 373view location 84, 239

delete 131drawing 132

view 133, 285InterPlot parameter file 479unassigned view 429

detachmodels 127, 279

dialog view rotation 209, 443dimensioning in whole millimeters 31, 39, 49discrimination

data file 140display

dimensions in whole millimeters 31, 39, 49report 330

drawingannotation 293

coordinate label 358mass annotation command 295name label 346symbology 343

bar menureview attribute 340select another drawing 221

borders 27categories 33, 418

review/revise 204category 200, 203

add 205remove 206

composition 227compose drawing 263compose drawing view 265copy

drawing view 253copy drawing view 86create

composite view 241drawing view 228plan view 259section view 256

copy 68create 59management 51manager 55

492

Ind

ex

Index________________ drawing (continued)

overlay 338plot size 29pull-down menu 196report 135symbology 343views

delete unassigned view 429graphic symbology 435named item 433Project Planner 425select

model 432update views 431

what is a drawing? 25drawing manager

before using 23create options 57

Drawing Managercustomization 41overview 21theory of operation 24

drawing viewwhat is a drawing view? 26

Eedit text 327element 195

commands 222eqp_object.dwg

mass annotation 296equipment 195

centerlines 315labels

mass annotation 296error

messages 481exit 211, 215, 453, 455, 457

Ffeatures 19file 195

pull-down menu 211in Project Planner 455

file design command 214, 456filled hidden line 445fit 200fonts 223forms

left/right screen 452

Ggraphics

symbology 435graphics environment 195grid on/off 208

Hhelp 225hidden line 445

Iin_object.dwg

mass annotation 296instrumentation

labelsmass annotation 296

introduction 19isometric

view 438

Llabel

category type 311fence contents 372placement 304

labels 39equipment

centerlines 315mass annotation 295

options 298name labels 346

options 349place labels

options 304update annotation 379update labels 321

labels.<xxx>mass annotation 297

lens 448level

symbologyoff 207, 451on 207, 450

levels 199line

weight 343looking

east 438north 438south 438west 438

493

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ Mmagnify 200mass annotation 295

drawing types 297equipment 296instrumentation 296labels 295labels.<xxx> 297object types 296options 298reject label 300reject labeling point 300skip current label 300window center to item 300<xxx>_object.dwg file 296

matchplanar element 441

match planar element 209measure distance 341millimeters

dimensions displayed in 31, 39, 49model

categories 280category

add 283remove 284review/revise 282

movedown 207left 207right 207up 207

Nname label 346name labels

options 349named

item 232, 433model 234project 236

named item 77model 79project 81

Next 197

Oopen

close 197overlay drawing 338

overviewDrawing Manager 21

Ppermanent color shading 444phong shading 446place

cell 333text and line 335

place labels 304options 304

plan view 438planar element

match 441plot

drawing 414drawing categories 418reference models 419

manager 413plot drawing 414

setupmanager 473

plot command 212plot plan

drawing views 426pull-down menu 425

viewing options 437plot size 29Previous 197project

planner 423command menu 424

seed file 31setup 459

Project Plannerdrawing views 425viewing options 425

project plannerpull-down menus

file 455plot plan 425view 454

project.ddl file 36pull-down menu

drawing 196file 211file design 214, 456plot 212viewing direction 209viewing more 207

494

Ind

ex

Index________________ Rredefine

individual views 114reference

models 118, 269, 419attach model 125, 275automatic attach verify 277copy

another drawing 273detach model 279

reference modelsautomatic attach verify 128copy

active drawing 271from another drawing 122

copy from active drawing 120detach model 127

reject label 300remove

drawing category 206model category 284

render 198render options 444rendering 224report

drawing 135files 140output 141records 140

report datadiscrimination data file 140files and records 140format file 140report output 141

reviewattribute 340drawing category 204

review/revisemodel category 282

revisecomposite

drawing viewdata 112individual views 114

drawing 104drawing view 107

data 109reference models 118revise drawing view data 109revise orientation 116

InterPlot parameter file 477

revise (continued)options 102orientation 116, 290text 326view data 288

revision markers 328rotate

3 points 442about view (x,y,z) 440

rotate viewabout x axis 209about y axis 209about z axis 209absolute 209by 3 points 209element 209relative 209

rotation 199

Ssaved

view 83, 238search criteria

for automatic labels 373for VHL 403

Search Criteria - Piping Segment form 154seed file

alternate 31select

another drawing 221model 432

setactive depth 210

absolute 210relative 210

display depth 210absolute 210relative 210

drawing symbology 343view orientation 438

settings 195commands 223

setup 23, 459shading

color 444show

active depth 210display depth 210

smooth shading 445standard notes 39

495

Drawing Manager User’s Guide - April 2002________________ stereo 446swap 197symbology

drawing 343

Ttables

Database 36text

size 343theory of operation 24tile 197title block

automatic 42typefaces 13

Uunassigned views 292units

workingwhole millimeters (no decimal places) 31, 39,

49update 197

all 207annotation

labels 379labels 321, 379

edit text 327revise text 326

left 207right 207view 207views 431window 439

usercommands 225preferences 225

usr 195

Vvector

hidden line managerviewing hidden line graphics 390

vector hidden line manager 381before using 382processing options

post 382pre 382

VHL 381processing options 382search criteria 403

view 195commands 197depth 210manipulations 449on 207pull-down menu from Project Planner 454rotation 209, 443toggle 207update 439

viewingcommands 200direction 209hidden line graphics 390more 207options 201

viewing options 200camera view 447color shading 444dialog view rotation 209, 443form screen 452from plot plan pull-down menu 437match planar element 441Project Planner 425rotate about view 440rotation 3 points 442set view orientation 438update window 439views 449

Wweight

display toggle 208whole millimeters

dimensions displayed in 31, 39, 49window

area 200center 200update 439

wiremesh 444working units

whole millimeters (no decimal places) 31, 39, 49

Zzoom

in 200out 200

496

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User’s Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200004B For PDS version 07.02.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200004A.

Drawing Manager User’s Guide Addendum – February 2003

498

Table of Contents Create Drawing (replaces 4.1.1) .............................................................................. 499 Create Drawing Data from ASCII File (replaces 4.1.2) .......................................... 503 Revise Options Form (replaces 4.4)......................................................................... 509

Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)..................................................................................... 511 Revise Revision .............................................................................................................. 514 Revise Site_ID for Drawings.......................................................................................... 516

Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project................................................................................ 517 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type .................................................................... 518 Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing ............................................................................. 519

Project Setup (replaces 13.0) ................................................................................... 520

499

Create Drawing (replaces 4.1.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (pp 59-62 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).

The following information has been added:

• Site ID field See the following text for details.

This option activates the Create Drawing form. It is used to create a drawing using the drawing filename and parameters specified. The illustrations in this section reflect a Equipment Arrangement Drawing type; however, the operation is the same for all drawing types.

The seed file for drawing creation is created automatically when you create a project. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator Reference Database User’s Guide for more information on project creation.

Field Descriptions Drawing Number — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define

the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created.

Special characters such as $@-/=#*and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number.

Drawing Name — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created.


500

Default Scale — Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing scale options. Select the desired drawing scale value from the list.

English Units - m’ m"=n’ n" where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model.

—OR —

Metric Units - n:nn where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.

Drawing scale values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1201. For the complete list of delivered drawing scale values, refer to the Standard Note Library Listings section in the PDS Reference Data Manager.

The drawing scale values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.

Drawing Size — Place a data point in this field to display the scroll list of drawing border size options. Select the desired drawing border size from the list.

Refer to Drawing Plot Size, page 29 for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types.

English Units

A 8 1/2 X 11

B 11X17

C 17X22

D 22X34

E 34X44

F 28X40

Metric Units

A0 840mm X 1189mm

A1 595mm X 840mm

A2 420mm X 595mm

A3 297mm X 420mm

A4 210mm X 297mm

501

Drawing size values are code-listed as Standard Note Type 1202. The drawing size values may be changed to suit your preferences. This is done using the Standard Note Library Manager option in PDS Reference Data Manager.

Drawing File Name — The system fills in the design file name (up to 14 characters total) as the drawing number with the file extension of .dgn. If the drawing number is greater than 11 characters, it is truncated to allow character space for the file extension.

You can modify the Drawing File Name.

Drawing File Directory — Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.

Workstation/Server Name — Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file.

Last Revision Number — This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.

Revision Number — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.

Revised By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. This field is optional.

Checked By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. This field is optional.

Revision Description — Key in up to 40 alphanumeric characters to provide a description of this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.

Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block Data form.

Site ID — This field specifies which work site owns the model. When creating models from the master site, the Site ID can be set to any site appearing in pdtable_105. When creating models from a satellite site, the Site ID is automatically set to the value for the satellite site. The master site can create models for any site. A satellite site can only create models for itself.

Steps 1. Select the Create Drawing option and drawing type from the Create Options form.

The system displays the Create Drawing form.

2. Key in the drawing number and name information.

3. Place a data point in the drawing size information fields to display a list of choices.

Select the desired choice from the scroll list.

4. Key in the scale, drawing size, pathname, and network address information.


502


6. Select the Supplemental Title Data Block button if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47.

7. Select the Site ID for the site to which the drawing will belong.

8. Accept or Reject

Select the defined drawing file parameters and select Accept.

Creating Drawing

The system copies the drawing seed file for the project to the specified drawing design file. It then clears the fields and the cursor returns to the beginning field.

9. Repeat the above step to define additional drawing files.

—OR —

Select Cancel to exit and return to the previous form.

503

Create Drawing Data from ASCII File (replaces 4.1.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (p. 63-67 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Site ID setting See the following text for details.

This command activates the Create Drawing with ASCII File form. It is used to create drawings and optional drawing views from a user-defined ASCII file. You can define as many drawings as necessary with one ASCII file. You can also define up to 15 drawing views for every drawing. Drawing views can only be created in conjunction with a drawing. You can select the active drawing type from a list of drawing types in the drawing management data of the Project Control Database. You can also submit the process immediately or select delayed batch processing. This command uses the PDcreate_dwg batch queue for processing.

The batch process returns a mail message that reports any errors that occurred during the creation process. The message reports any drawings or drawing views that were not created, and reports the reason the process failed. If an error occurs while creating a drawing view, the related drawing and drawing views are still created, but you need to use the Create Drawing View command to create the drawing view in which the error occurred. If a specified reference model cannot be attached, the drawing view is still created. The system sends you a mail message indicating which reference models were not attached.

Note: The system uses the PDcreate_dwg queue for this command.


504

Commands Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time — Submits or delays

submission of the job. When the toggle is set to Delayed Batch Submit Time, the system displays time fields, which allow you to delay submission until a more convenient time.

Field Definitions ASCII File Name — Key in the name of the ASCII file to use to create the drawing.

This file contains the information to create the drawing and optional drawing views.

Directory — Key in the path name where the ASCII file resides.

Network Address — Key in the network address where the ASCII file resides.

Before using this command You must create an ASCII file using the following format. Follow the examples on the right of the colons when you enter the data for your project. From Drawing_Number to Network_Address is information defining a drawing. Drawing_Number indicates a new drawing. Every drawing view is associated with the drawing that is defined above it. Each drawing view must be associated with a drawing. From View_Number to Reference_Models is information defining a drawing view. You can define multiple drawings and drawing views with one ASCII file.

505

Precede all comments with an exclamation mark (!), as shown below. Drawing_Number:00ascii02Drawing_Name: ASCII Creation!Each drawing name specifies a new drawing and each!drawing view specified between two drawing-name fields!is related to the proceeding drawing name.Default_Scale:3/8"=1’Drawing_Size:1File_Spec:draw005.dgnPath_Name:c:\newpipe\Network_Address:deason!Next line begins drawing view definitionView_Number:d0005View_Name:Plan!This drawing view is associated with the 00ascii02!ASCII Creation drawing.View_Scale:3/8"=1’Orientation:1Easting_Low:1358:0Northing_Low:415:0Elevation_Low:9:11Easting_High:1376:0Northing_High:433:0Elevation_High:27:11Composition_Point:5Reference_Models:bcpipe01,38pip01,39pipe01

File Field Definitions Site_ID: — An optional value for the site ID. If no value is specified, the site ID will

be the same as the project site ID set in pdtable_101. If the project does not belong to a site, the site ID is set to NULL.

Drawing_Number: — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 24 characters) to define the drawing number (short name) of the drawing file to be created, use lower case letters only. Special characters such as $-/=#* and a blank space cannot be used to define the drawing number.

Drawing_Name: — Key in an alphanumeric value (up to 40 characters) to define the long name of the drawing file to be created. This information is optional.

Default_Scale: — Key in the drawing scale. If a value is not specified, the default scale is used.

Drawing_Size: — Key in a standard note value for the border size. Refer to the Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types. The standard note value and not the standard note text must be used in this field. This value can be found in Standard Note 1202.

File_Spec: — Key in the drawing design file name, use lower case letters. Be sure to include the .dgn extension.

Path_Name: — Key in the path name where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system will use the data specified in the Project Setup command.


506

Network_Address: — Key in the network address where the drawing design file resides. If a value is not specified or a keyword missing, the system uses the data specified in the Project Setup command.

View_Number: — Key in a drawing view number for this drawing.

View_Name: — Key in the drawing view name for this drawing view.

View_Scale: — Key in the view scale. If a value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the default scale for the drawing is used.

Orientation: — Key in the standard note value for the orientation. Do not use the standard note text in this field. This value is defined in Standard Note 1620.

Easting_Low:, Northing_Low:, and Elevation_Low — Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the first corner point for the cube in the form X’ X". (You can use a negative value to indicate a westing or southing point or negative elevation.)

Note: The values for the volume coordinates may be in any format that MicroStation will accept for keyed-in dimension data. For example, the value for two feet, six and one half inches may be expressed as 0:30.5, 2’6.5", 2:6 1/2, 2:6.5, 30.5",or 2.55’.

Easting_High:, Northing_High:, and Elevation_High — Key in the absolute Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates for the second corner point for the cube. This point must be diagonally opposed to the first corner point.

Composition Point — Key in one of the following numerical values that relate to a composition point. Key in 1 for left-top, 2 for right-top, 3 for left-bottom, 4 for right-bottom, or 5 for center composition.

Note: This keyword is optional; do not include it within the ASCII file if you do not wish to assign a value to it.

Reference_Models: — Key in the reference model numbers as used in the model management data of the Project Control Database. Separate each model number with a comma. The maximum line length is 132 characters. End each line that will be followed by another line of model numbers with a dash (-) to define more reference models. Each drawing created from an ASCII file must have at least one value for this keyword.

Other Valid Keywords You may also include other keywords in the ASCII file to perform specific functions.

Saved_View: — This keyword allows you to create drawing views using data from existing saved views.

The syntax for this keyword is:

Saved_View:model number,saved view name,OPTION

507

The model number setting specifies the model that contains the saved view. This setting is case sensitive. The saved view name setting defines the saved view from which to read data when creating the new drawing view. This setting is not case sensitive. The OPTION setting specifies whether or not models attached to the source view will also be attached to the created view. The valid values for this setting are ALL, which attaches all the models, and NO_ATTACHED, which attaches none of the models. The default setting is ALL.

Note: If any of the clipping coordinates or view orientation are specified in the ASCII file after the saved_view keyword, those settings override the settings in the saved view.

For example, in the drawing view generated using the following ASCII file, the Easting coordinate would be 100, and the drawing view orientation would be Top, regardless of the Easting High and Orientation settings in the saved view. saved_view:model1,ram1,ALLEasting_High:100:0Orientation:1

MD_PROPAGATED and MD_SPARSE — You may add keywords to the ASCII file that specify whether "propagated" (including sparse models propagated onto themselves) or just "sparse" structural models are to be attached to the drawing view.

The default is that drawings will be created with propagated structural models; however, the keywords MD_PROPAGATED or MD_SPARSE may be included within the drawing view definition before the REFERENCE_MODELS keyword to specify which type to attach.

Caution: The batch process will return a mail message if a sparse model has been selected within the ASCII file, but has not been defined within the model management data of the Project Control Database. This could be the result of the following situations:

1. The ModelDraft project in question is not included within the PDS project; this would mean that structural models were done outside of PDS, and no entries for the sparse models exist in PD_Table 113.

2. The ModelDraft project in question is included within the PDS project, but no models have yet been created.

Note: The Create Drawing from ASCII File command will restrict you to creating only drawing views of the type specified by keyword (propagated or sparse). If no keyword is used, by default the drawing views will be created using propagated structural models.

MATCHLINES — You may also add the keyword MATCHLINES to automatically create match lines and corresponding coordinate labels during the creation of a drawing view.


508


Keyin Data or Select Option Key in the file specifications, then set the submit toggle to the desired setting. Select Accept to create the drawing(s) and drawing view(s) with the specified ASCII file.

Note: If an error occurs in creating a drawing view, the drawing to which the view is associated and any other drawing views for that drawing will be created. In this situation, you must create the desired drawing view manually.

If a reference model cannot be attached, an error will be reported to you through the mail message, and the drawing view will be not be created.

In order to load title block information after drawing creation by ASCII file, go to the Revise Drawing form and select Load Title Block.

509

Revise Options Form (replaces 4.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (p. 102-103 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Revise Revision • Revise Site ID for Drawings

See the following text for details.

This command activates the Revise Options form. It is used to revise the database information for an existing drawing and drawing view and for the drawing file.

Commands Revise Drawing — Revise drawing attributes.

Revise Drawing View — Revise drawing view attributes and the drawing file.

Revise Revision— Revises an existing drawing revision.

Revise Site_ID for Drawings — Assigns a drawing file to a different work site.

Steps 1. Select the Revise option from the Drawing Manager form.

The system displays the Revise Options form.


510

2. Select one of the Revise options.

For each Revise option, the system displays the available Drawing types (defined in Standard Note 2000) in a display list.

511

Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (p. 104-106 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).

The following information has been modified:

• Automatic date update in Revised By and Checked By fields See the following text for details.

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form, which revises an existing drawing.

Field Descriptions Drawing Number — Place a data point in the field and delete the current number,

then key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number.

Drawing Name — Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name.

Completion Status — Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage complete.

Default Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale.

Previous Revision Number — This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.

Current Revision Number — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters to identify this revision of the drawing. This field is optional.


512

Revised By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who revised the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Revised By field is optional.

Checked By — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who checked the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Checked By field is optional.

Approved By (1-4) — Key in up to four alphanumeric characters to identify the user who approved the drawing. The Date field is automatically updated. The Approved By fields are optional.

Note that this option eliminates the need to use the Approve Drawing form. However, the Approve Drawing form is still available as well.


Do Not Load Title Block / Load Title Block — Set this toggle to Load Title Block if you want the revisions being made to be reflected on the title block before the drawing is approved. If you select Do Not Load Title Block, you can still load this information to the title block when the drawing is approved using the Approve Drawing command.

Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for more information on the Supplemental Title Block Data.

Steps 1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form.




The system activates the Select Drawing form with a list of all of the drawings defined for the project.

3. Select Drawing


The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing.




513

6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47.


The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes.

8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options form.


514

Revise Revision The Revise Revision form is used to revise existing drawing revisions.

Field Descriptions Drawing Number — This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.

Drawing Name — This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.

Completion Status — This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.

Default Scale — This field is read-only and cannot be edited by the user.

PDS Revision Numbers — This field displays the existing revision numbers for the drawing. Select a revision from the list to display information about that revision.





515




Steps 1. Select the Revise Revision option from the Revise Options form.





3. Select Drawing


The system displays the Revise Revision form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing.





6. You can select another revision, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Select Drawing form.


516

Revise Site_ID for Drawings This option allows you to reassign drawings to different work sites by changing the site ID by project, drawing type, or drawing.

Note: This option is only available at the master site.

Options By Project – Displays drawings by project for Site ID revision.

By Drawing Type – Displays drawings by drawing type for Site ID revision.

By Drawing– Displays individual drawings for Site ID revision.

517

Revise Site ID for Drawings By Project This option allows you to update the Site ID for drawings in the active project.


Field Descriptions Drawing Number – Lists all the drawings in the active project.

Source Site_ID – Displays the current site to which the drawing belongs.

Destination Site_ID – Specifies the new site to which the drawing will belong.

Change All to Same Site_ID – Allows you to change all drawing in the active project to belong to the same site.

Operating Sequence Specific Drawings 1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.

The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays.

2. Select the Destination Site_ID to change.

The Select Site form displays.

3. Select a site.

4. Click Accept.

The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with the new Site ID.

All Drawings in Project 1. Select By Projects from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.

The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays.

2. Click Change All to Same Site_ID.

The Site_ID for All Models field displays.

3. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field.


4. Select a site.

5. Click Accept.

The Revise Site_ID for Drawings form displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site ID.


518

Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing Type This option allows you to change the Site ID for drawings of a particular drawing type.


Operating Sequence Specific Drawings 1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.

2. Select a drawing type.

3. Click Accept.



5. Select a site.

6. Click Accept.


All Drawings of Drawing Type 1. Select By Drawing Type from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.


3. Click Accept.

4. Click Change All to Same Site_ID.

The Site_ID for All Drawings field displays.

5. Select the Site_ID for All Drawings field.


6. Select a site.

7. Click Accept.

The Revise Site_ID for Drawings forms displays with all drawings assigned to the new Site ID.

519

Revise Site ID for Drawings By Drawing This option allows you to change the site ID for individual drawings.


Operating Sequence 1. Select By Drawing from the Revise Site_ID for Drawings form.


3. Click Accept.

4. Select a drawing.

5. Click Accept.



7. Select a site.

8. Click Accept.



520

Project Setup (replaces 13.0) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (pp 459-462 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Supplemental Title Block Data button See the following text for details.

This option activates the Project Setup form. It provides various options to define defaults for all drawings created in a project. It also provides fields that allow you to set up drawing directories, network address name, drawing scale, and drawing size for each drawing type. These fields, displayed on the right side of the form, can be used independently of the options at the top of the form. If only these fields are defined, all reference categories and drawing types are available when you create a drawing. There can only be one default directory for each drawing type.

There are also fields available for entering the cell library name, directory, and network address of the cell library to be used for annotation in the drawings. Each drawing type may use either the project cell library or an alternate cell library. For more information about cells, the project cell library, and alternate cell libraries, refer to Drawing Manager Theory of Operation, page 24.

Caution: Once any of the options are used, the system displays only the defined reference categories (disciplines) and model data display categories for the drawings of that drawing type. Reference models that are attached to drawings not in the defined reference categories will not be available for selection as reference models.

521

Commands Drawing Type — Displays the project drawing types. Refer to Drawing Type, page

463 for more information.

Reference Categories — Defines a default list of reference-model data categories that determines which levels in an attached model are on and off for a drawing type. It also filters models with the definitions specified using the Automatic Attach & Verify option. See Automatic Attach & Verify, page 277 for more information.

Copy Drawing Type — Copies an existing project setup. Refer to Copy Drawing Type, page 468 for more information.

Remove Reference — Removes all reference model data categories in a given drawing type which were previously defined using the Reference Categories option for the project. See Remove Reference, page 470 for more information.

Plotting Categories — Specifies which levels in a drawing are to be plotted for a specific drawing type. You can remove data categories from the plotting list by placing a data point on the appropriate category names. See Plotting Categories, page 471 for more information.

Label Filter — Specifies which labels will be available for annotation of a specific drawing type. You can remove labels from the display list by placing a data point on the appropriate label names. See Label Filter, page 472 for more information.

Field Descriptions All Project Setup options have the following fields on their forms:

Drawing Directory — Key in the location of the directory to contain the drawing file.


522

Network Address — Key in the node address of the workstation to contain the drawing file.

Drawing Scale — Select a value from the display list of plotted scales for the drawing. This sets the default scale factor. You can change the scale when you create/revise each drawing. The scale factors are in the Standard Note Library. The scale of the drawing view can be modified at time of creation.

English Units - m’ m" = n’ n" — Where m is the scale on the drawing and n is the scale on the model. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the drawing represents 1 foot in the model.

Metric Units - n:nn — Where n is the scale on the drawing and nn is the scale on the

model. For example, 1:100 indicates that 1 mm on the drawing represents 100 mm in the model.

Drawing Size — Select either A, B, C, D, E, or F from the display list of border

sizes. Refer to the section on Drawing Plot Size Table in the Drawing Manager Setup section for information on the drawing border reference files for the various sizes and drawing types.

English

A 8 1/2 X 11 B 11X17 C 17X22 D 22X34 E 34X44 F 28X40

Metric

A0 840mm X 1189mm A1 595mm X 840mm A2 420mm X 595mm A3 297mm X 420mm A4 210mm X 297mm

523

Cell Library Name — Key in the name of an alternate cell library to be used for this drawing type. If nothing is entered here, the project cell library will be chosen by default.

Cell Directory — Specifies the directory in which the cell library resides.

Cell Network Address — Specifies the network address of the machine on which the cell library resides.

Project Seed File/Alternate Seed File — Specifies whether the project seed drawing or an alternate seed drawing is to be used in creating drawings. The alternate seed drawings, named draw_seed.<drawing_type>, will be created in the project directory. See Seed Files, page 31 for more information on this option.

Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to access the Supplemental Title Block Data form.

Steps 1. Select the Project Setup command from the Drawing Management form.

The system displays the Project Setup form with a Drawing Type display list.

2. Select the Drawing Type option from the Project Setup form.

The system activates a scrolling list of drawing types, and expects a specific type to be selected before further action can be taken. When a drawing type is selected, the system activates a form that allows you to key in the defaults of the selected drawing type.

If there is a drawing category whose default values you would like to copy, select the Copy Drawing Type option. This option will display a scrolling list of drawing types. When a drawing type is selected from this list and the form is confirmed, the system will copy the default location, scale, size, and cell information of that drawing type into the fields of the previously selected drawing type.

3. Select the Reference Categories or Remove Reference option.

The system activates a form that allows you to modify a list of reference categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project.

4. Select the Plotting Categories option.

The system activates a form that allows you to pick plotting categories to remove or include when creating a drawing in the project.

5. Select the Label Filter option.

The system activates a form that allows you to pick annotation labels that will be displayed on the label placement forms in the graphics environment.

6. Select the Project Seed File / Alternate Seed File toggle setting that is appropriate for this drawing type.


524

7. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data command if you want to add information to the title block.

525

Index create

drawing, 499 drawing data from ASCII file, 503

drawing create, 499 create data from ASCII file, 503 revise, 511

project setup, 520

revise drawing, 511 options, 509 revision, 514

site ID for drawings, 516 site ID for drawings by drawing, 519 site ID for drawings by drawing type, 518 site ID for drawings by project, 517

revision revise, 514

setup project, 520

site ID revise, 516 revise for drawings by drawing, 519 revise for drawings by drawing type, 518 revise for drawings by project, 517

Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User’s Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200004C For PDS version 07.03.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200004B.

527

Table of Contents Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1)...............................................................................528 Compose Drawing (replaces 6.6) .............................................................................531

Area Volume Graphics....................................................................................................534

Drawing Manager User’s Guide Addendum – October 2004

528

Revise Drawing (replaces 4.4.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (p. 611-613 in the PDS 7.2 version of the document).


• Added Drawing File Name field description See the following text for details.

This option activates the Drawing Selection form. It is used to revise the definition of an existing drawing. It also changes the database attributes associated with a specified drawing. First, the system displays the Drawing Number display list, and it then displays the Revise Drawing form, which revises an existing drawing.

Field Descriptions Drawing Number — Place a data point in the field and delete the current number,

then key in the new drawing number. You can key in up to 24 characters to change the drawing number.

Drawing Name — Place a data point in the field and delete the current name, then key in the new drawing name. You can key in up to 40 characters to change the drawing name.

Drawing File Name — This field is updated automatically when you change the Drawing Number. You can also place a data point in the field and key in a new drawing file name of up to 14 characters.

Completion Status — Place a data point in the field and key in a number for the percentage complete.

Default Scale — Place a data point in the field to activate a scale display list, and select from the available scale values to change the current displayed drawing scale.

Previous Revision Number — This field displays the current revision number of the drawing. This field cannot be edited by the user.

529








Supplemental Title Block Data — Select this button to display the Supplemental Title Block Data form. Refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47 for more information on the Supplemental Title Block Data.

Steps 1. Select the Revise Drawing option from the Revise Options form.





3. Select Drawing


The system displays the Revise Drawing form with the current attribute values for the specified drawing.




530


6. Select the Supplemental Title Block Data button, if you want to specify input data into new attributes in pdtable_121. For more information, refer to Supplemental Title Block Data, page 47.


The system updates the database, and returns to the Select Drawing form. The form is updated to reflect the revisions made to the drawing attributes.

8. You can select another drawing, or select Cancel to exit and return to the Revise Options form.

531

Compose Drawing (replaces 6.6) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Drawing Manager User’s Guide (p. 263-264 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Volume Graphics command See the following text for details.

This option activates the Compose Drawing form. It is used to control the placement and characteristics of drawing views (or composite drawing views) within the drawing border.

You can place, manipulate, revise and delete the drawing views. It is also used, along with a series of other forms, to turn off the drawing view displays before the hidden-line graphics can be viewed in the drawing environment.

Field Descriptions Number— Displays the number (up to 24 characters) that identifies the drawing

view.

Name— Displays the name (up to 40 characters) that describes the drawing view.

Scale— Displays the scale of the drawing view.



532

Commands Display / Snap / Locate— These toggles set the Display, Snap, and Locate features

to either ON or OFF. These options are only valid for composed drawing views, and they only appear when a reference model is selected from the list.

Display On / Off - Controls whether or not the selected reference models will display on the screen and on plotted drawings.

Snap On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can "snap to" points in the selected reference models.

Locate On / Off - Controls whether or not the user can copy database information from the reference models into the active file.

Compose Drawing View — Select to place the active drawing view within the drawing border.

Reference Models —Select to copy reference files, attach and detach models, add, remove, and review model categories. Refer to Reference Models, page 269 for more information.

Delete Drawing View — Select and press <D> to accept the highlighted drawing view for deletion. Press <R> to reject the view and make another selection.

The system deletes the alphanumeric description of the drawing view in the database files and deletes the drawing composition graphics for the drawing view from the drawing. It also detaches the reference file attachments for the drawing view.

Align Drawing View — Select to align two existing (composed) drawing views. Refer to Align Drawing View, page 286 for more information.

Revise View Data —Select to revise the clipping volume and scale data of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise View Data, page 288 for more information.

Revise Orientation — Select to change the viewing direction of the active drawing view (or composite drawing view). Refer to Revise Orientation, page 290 for more information.

Unassigned Views — Select to activate a list of unassigned views from which you can choose a view to be composed. Refer to Unassigned Views, page 292 for more information.

Volume Graphics — Select to display clash and design area volumes as graphical blocks in the drawing.

533


Select Drawing View Select the appropriatect drawing view number from the list of drawing views.

Select Options Set toggle locks (only valid for composed drawing views) to on or off, then select any other appropriate option.


534

Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the drawing so that you can see their location.

For the Drawing Graphics environment, you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator. Please refer to the Project Administator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology.

Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments, you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B.

In addition, the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping, Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL

Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables.

535

Commands Place Diagonal Lines - Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for

easier identification in the drawing.

Add / Revise Graphics - Select the area to add to the model, or unselect an already selected drawing to remove it from the drawing.

Remove Graphics - Removes the selected area from the drawing.

Hilite Graphics - Highlights the area in the drawing.

Update Graphics - Updates areas that are already displayed in the drawing. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed, or if the drawing view definition has changed. Drawing view definition includes drawing view location in the drawing, drawing view scale, and drawing view location.


536

Index Area Volume Graphics command ..................534 compose

drawing.......................................................531 drawing

compose......................................................531

revise ......................................................... 528 revise

drawing ...................................................... 528 volume graphics

displaying .................................................. 534

pds drawing manager

Documents